Samsung Electronics Co SGHI317 Cellular/PCS GSM/EDGE/WCDMA Phone with LTE, WLAN, RFID and Bluetooth User Manual i317 Galaxy Note II
Samsung Electronics Co Ltd Cellular/PCS GSM/EDGE/WCDMA Phone with LTE, WLAN, RFID and Bluetooth i317 Galaxy Note II
Contents
- 1. User Manual
- 2. Users Manual
User Manual
4 G tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie ta ry This document is watermarked because certain important information in the document has not yet been verified. This document has been sent to you as a draft and for informational purposes only. The document should only be used for internal purposes and may not be distributed outside of Samsung, except to Samsung's carrier customer for testing purposes. Distributing the document outside of Samsung, except to Samsung's carrier customer for testing purposes could result in legal exposure to the company if the preliminary, unverified information in the draft turns out to be inaccurate. L T E S M A R T P H O N E User Manual on fid en Please read this manual before operating your phone, and keep it for future reference. Intellectual Property tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie ta ry All Intellectual Property, as defined below, owned by or which is otherwise the property of Samsung or its respective suppliers relating to the SAMSUNG Phone, including but not limited to, accessories, parts, or software relating there to (the “Phone System”), is proprietary to Samsung and protected under federal laws, state laws, and international treaty provisions. Intellectual Property includes, but is not limited to, inventions (patentable or unpatentable), patents, trade secrets, copyrights, software, computer programs, and related documentation and other works of authorship. You may not infringe or otherwise violate the rights secured by the Intellectual Property. Moreover, you agree that you will not (and will not attempt to) modify, prepare derivative works of, reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to create source code from the software. No title to or ownership in the Intellectual Property is transferred to you. All applicable rights of the Intellectual Property shall remain with SAMSUNG and its suppliers. Open Source Software Some software components of this product, including but not limited to 'PowerTOP' and 'e2fsprogs', incorporate source code covered under GNU General Public License (GPL), GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL), OpenSSL License, BSD License and other open source licenses. To obtain the source code covered under the open source licenses, please visit: http://opensource.samsung.com. Disclaimer of Warranties; Exclusion of Liability on fid en EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN THE EXPRESS WARRANTY CONTAINED ON THE WARRANTY PAGE ENCLOSED WITH THE PRODUCT, THE PURCHASER TAKES THE PRODUCT "AS IS", AND SAMSUNG MAKES NO EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE MERCHANTABILITY OF THE PRODUCT OR ITS FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE; THE DESIGN, CONDITION OR QUALITY OF THE PRODUCT; THE PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT; THE WORKMANSHIP OF THE PRODUCT OR THE COMPONENTS CONTAINED THEREIN; OR COMPLIANCE OF THE PRODUCT WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF ANY LAW, RULE, SPECIFICATION OR CONTRACT PERTAINING SGH-I317_UM_English_UCALI6_WC_091212_D2 ta ry THERETO. NOTHING CONTAINED IN THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SHALL BE CONSTRUED TO CREATE AN EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT. IN ADDITION, SAMSUNG SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING FROM THE PURCHASE OR USE OF THE PRODUCT OR ARISING FROM THE BREACH OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY, INCLUDING INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR LOSS OF ANTICIPATED PROFITS OR BENEFITS. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie SAMSUNG IS NOT LIABLE FOR PERFORMANCE ISSUES OR INCOMPATIBILITIES CAUSED BY YOUR EDITING OF REGISTRY SETTINGS, OR YOUR MODIFICATION OF OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE. USING CUSTOM OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE MAY CAUSE YOUR DEVICE AND APPLICATIONS TO WORK IMPROPERLY. on fid en SAFE™ ("Samsung Approved For Enterprise") TO THE FULL EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO., LTD., SAMSUNG TELECOMMUNICATIONS AMERICA, LLC, AND THEIR AFFILIATES (COLLECTIVELY REFERRED TO HEREIN AS THE "SAMSUNG ENTITIES") EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ANY AND ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, INTEROPERABILITY OR NON-INFRINGEMENT, WITH RESPECT TO INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY SECURITY PROTECTION, SAFE™ APPROVED DEVICES AND SAFE™ APPROVED APPLICATIONS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE SAMSUNG ENTITIES BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY SECURITY PROTECTION, SAFE™ APPROVED DEVICES OR SAFE™ APPROVED APPLICATIONS. In addition, information technology security protection will be affected by features or functionality associated with, among other things the e-mail platform, master data management, and virtual private network solutions selected by the software provider, solution provider or user. Choice of an e-mail, master data management, and virtual private network solution is at the sole discretion of the software provider, solution provider or user and any associated effect on information technology security protection is solely the responsibility of the software provider, solution provider or user. For complete statement of limited warranty, please refer to www.samsung.com/us/safe, available on the web and where Samsung smartphone and Galaxy Tab™ devices are sold. 1000 Klein Rd. Richardson, TX 75082 Plano, TX 75074 Toll Free Tel: 1.888.987.HELP (4357) Internet Address: http://www.samsungusa.com ta Customer Care Center: 1301 E. Lookout Drive tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Headquarters: ry Samsung Telecommunications America (STA), LLC ©2012 Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC. Samsung is a registered trademark of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Do you have questions about your Samsung Mobile Phone? For 24 hour information and assistance, we offer a new FAQ/ARS System (Automated Response System) at: http://www.samsung.com/us/support. Nuance®, VSuite™, T9® Text Input, and the Nuance logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nuance Communications, Inc., or its affiliates in the United States and/or other countries. The Bluetooth® word mark, figure mark (stylized “B Design”), and combination mark (Bluetooth word mark and “B Design”) are registered trademarks and are wholly owned by the Bluetooth SIG. fid en microSD™ and the microSD logo are Trademarks of the SD Card Association. Openwave® is a registered Trademark of Openwave, Inc. on and are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. CS Headphone and WOW HD technologies are incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc. TM , DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logos are trademarks of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are used under license. ry DivX Certified® to play DivX® video up to HD 720p, including premium content. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie ta ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX, LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi Corporation. This is an official DivX Certified® device that plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX videos. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play purchased DivX Video-onDemand (VOD) movies. To obtain your registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in your device setup menu (tap Apps > Settings > About device > Legal information > License settings > DivX® VOD > Register). Go to vod.divx.com for more information on how to complete your registration. Google, the Google logo, Android, the Android logo, Google Play, Gmail, Google Mail, Google Maps, Google Music, Google Talk, Picasa, YouTube and other marks are trademarks of Google Inc. Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of the Wireless Fidelity Alliance, Inc. Swype and the Swype logos are trademarks of Swype, Inc. © 2010 Swype, Inc. All rights reserved. fid en Devices purchased for use on AT&T's system are designed for use exclusively on AT&T's system. You agree that you won't make any modifications to the Equipment or programming to enable the Equipment to operate on any other system. A voice plan is required on all voice-capable devices, unless specifically noted otherwise in the terms governing your agreement. Some devices or plans may require you to subscribe to a data plan. on Your phone is designed to make it easy for you to access a wide variety of content. For your protection, AT&T wants you to be aware that some applications that you enable may involve the location of your phone being shared. For applications available through AT&T, AT&T offers privacy controls that let you decide how an application may use the location of your phone and other phones on your account. However, AT&T's privacy tools do not apply to applications available outside of AT&T. Please review the terms and conditions and the associated privacy policy for each location-based service to learn how location information will be used and protected. ta ry Your phone may be used to access the Internet and to download, and/or purchase goods, applications, and services from AT&T or elsewhere from third parties. AT&T provides tools for you to control access to the Internet and certain Internet content. These controls may not be available for certain devices which bypass AT&T controls. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie AT&T may collect certain types of information from your device when you use AT&T services to provide customer support and to improve its services. For more information on AT&T's Privacy Policy, visit http://www.att.com/privacy. Your phone features earSmart™, an intelligent voice processor that delivers a clear voice experience, allowing you to hear and be heard™ in nearly any environment. earSmart technology uses the science of human hearing to distinguish sounds, identify your voice and suppress surrounding noise, for clear conversations just about anywhere. How Does It Work? • The earSmart voice processor in your phone captures your voice and all the sounds around you. • Working like the human ear, it processes and distinguishes these sounds, isolates your voice conversation, and removes background noise from both ends of a call. fid en • It also automatically equalizes and adjusts voice volume so you can hear and talk naturally, even in the noisiest places. • With earSmart technology, you can talk where you want, and have clear conversations for mobile calls, video chats, even speakerphone calls, on without worrying about surrounding noise. Table of Contents ry Notification Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Section 3: Call Functions ............................48 Displaying Your Phone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . Making a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Making Emergency Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Making a Call Using Speed Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . Making a Call from the Address Book . . . . . . . . Answering a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dialing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Call Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Call Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options During a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Call Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Setting Up Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Charging a Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Switching the Phone On or Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Locking and Unlocking the Touch Screen . . . . . .12 Setting up your Phone with Ready2Go . . . . . . . .12 Creating a Samsung Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Creating a New Google Account . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Retrieving your Google Account Password . . . . .13 Setting Up Your Voice Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 ta Section 1: Getting Started .............................6 Section 2: Understanding Your Phone ........15 on fid en Features of Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Front View of Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Side Views of Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Rear View of Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 S Pen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Display Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Menu Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Customizing Your Home Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 48 48 49 50 51 51 52 52 55 55 59 Section 4: Entering Text ..............................66 Text Input Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering Text Using the Samsung Keyboard . . . Changing the Text Input Mode - Keypad . . . . . . Using ABC Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Symbol/Numeric Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 66 67 67 68 ry tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Section 5: Contacts and Your Address Book ......................................................... 72 Using Playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Google Play Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Video Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Play Movies & TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Using the Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Camera Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Using the Camcorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Camcorder Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 ta Predictive Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Entering Text Using Handwriting . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Samsung Keyboard Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Using the Google Voice Typing Feature . . . . . . . 69 Entering Text Using Swype . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 fid en AT&T Address Book Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Adding a New Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Editing an Existing Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Using Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Joining Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Synchronizing Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Address Book Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Address Book Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Managing Address Book Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Section 6: Multimedia ................................. 85 on AT&T Locker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Media Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Music Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Music Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Section 7: Messaging ............................... 104 Types of Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Creating and Sending Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Message Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Viewing New Received Messages . . . . . . . . . . 107 Deleting Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Message Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Messaging Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Using Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Using Gmail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Google Talk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Google + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 C on fid en tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Accessing Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Wi-Fi Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Bluetooth settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 Data Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 More Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 Home screen mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 Blocking Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 Sound Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Power Saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 Applications Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 Location Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 Lock Screen Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 One-handed operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 Language and input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 ry Section 8: Changing Your Settings ...........119 Cloud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Back up and reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S Pen Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessory Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Date and time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Developer options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ta Messenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Messages App . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 ChatON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 144 145 146 147 148 148 149 149 151 152 Section 9: Connections .............................154 Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wi-Fi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NFC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PC Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NFC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 160 164 164 168 170 Section 10: Applications ...........................171 AllShare Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AT&T Code Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AT&T FamilyMap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AT&T Locker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 175 176 177 ta ry Local . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Media Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Messenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Mobile Hotspot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Music Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Music Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 My Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 myAT&T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Paper Artist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Play Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Play Magazines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Play Movies & TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Play Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Play Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Polaris Office 4.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 S Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 S Suggest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 on fid en tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie AT&T Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 AT&T Ready2Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 AT&T Smart Wi-Fi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 ChatON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 DeviceHelp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Downloads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Flipboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Gmail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Google . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Google + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Group Cast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Kies air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Latitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 ta ry Responsible Listening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC) Regulations for Wireless Devices . . . . . . . . Restricting Children's Access to Your Mobile Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FCC Notice and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Other Important Safety Information . . . . . . . . tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie S Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196 Talk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196 Video Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197 Voice Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197 Voice Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198 YouTube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198 YPmobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199 Section 11: Health and Safety Information .............................................200 218 220 220 221 Section 12: Warranty Information ............223 Standard Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 End User License Agreement for Software . . . 228 Section 13: Samsung Product Registration ............................................234 Index ...........................................................235 on fid en Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) Signals . . . .200 Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Certification Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 FCC Part 15 Information to User . . . . . . . . . . . .206 Smart Practices While Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 Battery Use and Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208 Samsung Mobile Products and Recycling . . . . .210 UL Certified Travel Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 Display / Touch-Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 GPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212 Emergency Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212 Care and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213 214 216 Section 1: Getting Started ry ta Setting Up Your Phone 2. Lift the cover up (2) and to the right of the phone. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie This section explains how to start using your phone by first configuring your hardware, activating your service, and then setting up your voice mail. Prior to use it is necessary to install both the battery and SIM into their corresponding internal compartments. The microSD™ card slot is also located in this same internal area. 1. Remove the back cover by inserting a fingernail into the slot on the top of your phone (1). on fid en Caution! Do not bend or twist the back cover excessively. Doing so may damage the cover. Installing the SIM Card When you subscribe to a cellular network, you are provided with a plug-in SIM card loaded with your subscription details, such as your PIN, available optional services, and many others features. Carefully slide the SIM card into the SIM card socket (as shown) until the card locks into place. • Make sure that the card’s gold contacts face into the phone and that the upper-left angled corner of the card is positioned as shown. ry ta Installing the Battery 1. Insert the battery into the opening on the back of the phone, making sure the connectors align (1). 2. Gently press down to secure the battery (2). Incorrect fid en Correct on 䡲 Note: If the card is not inserted correctly, the phone will not detect the SIM card. Re-orient the card back into the slot if the SIM is not detected. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Important! The plug-in SIM card information and its contacts can be easily damaged by scratching or bending, so be careful when handling, inserting, or removing the card. Keep all SIM cards out of reach of small children. Getting Started Correct ta tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie You can use a microSD (SD) or microSDHC card to expand available memory space if you desire. This secure digital card enables you to exchange images, music, and data between SD-compatible devices. This type of memory card is designed for use with this mobile phone and other devices. ry Removing and Installing the Memory Card Note: Your phone has been tested to support up to a 64GB memory card. Installing the Memory Card Push the microSD card into the slot until it clicks (as shown). • Make sure the microSD’s gold contact pins face downward and the card is securely inserted. on fid en 䡲 For more information on Memory Cards, see “Memory Card” on page 46. Removing the Memory Card 1. Push on the memory card until it clicks and is released. 2. Grasp the memory card and remove it from the phone. Installing the Back Cover 2. Press along the edge of the back cover (3) until you have a secure seal. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie ta ry 1. Place the battery cover onto the back of the phone (1) and press down (2). Note: Make sure the battery is properly installed before switching on the phone. on fid en Charging a Battery Your device is powered by a rechargeable Li-ion battery. The Travel Charger that is used to charge the battery, is included with your device. Use only Samsung-approved batteries and chargers. Getting Started ta ry Note: You must fully charge the battery before using your phone for the first time. A discharged battery recharges fully in approximately 4 hours. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Note: Long backlight settings, searching for service, vibrate mode, web browser use, and other variables may reduce the battery’s talk and standby times. Correct Although you can use the phone while the battery is charging, doing so will require additional charging time. Using the Travel Charger Incorrect 10 on fid en Important! Verify that the handset battery is installed prior to connection. If the battery is not properly installed and the wall charger is connected, the handset may power off and on continuously, preventing proper operation. 1. Plug the flat end of the Travel Charger into the Power/ Accessory Interface connector and the other end into a standard AC wall outlet. 2. When charging is finished, remove the flat end from the interface connector jack on the phone. Switching the Phone On or Off until the phone switches ta ry 1. Press and hold on. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Warning! If your handset has a touch screen display, please note that a touch screen responds best to a light touch from the pad of your finger. Using excessive force or a metallic object when pressing on the touch screen may damage the tempered glass surface and void the warranty. For more information, refer to “Standard Limited Warranty” on page 223. Note: Failure to unplug the wall charger before you remove the battery, can cause damage to the phone. Low Battery Indicator fid en When the battery is weak and only a few minutes of talk time remain, the battery icon ( ) blinks and the device sounds a warning tone at regular intervals. In this condition, your phone conserves its remaining battery power, not by turning off the backlight, but by entering the dimming mode. For a quick check of your battery level, glance at the battery charge indicator located in the upper-right corner of your device’s display. Solid color ( ) indicates a full charge. on When the battery level becomes too low, the phone automatically turns off. 2. Swipe your finger across the screen to unlock the phone. Note: The display language is preset to English at the factory. To change the language, use the Language menu. For more information, refer to “Changing Your Settings” on page 119. Getting Started 11 3. To switch off the phone, press and hold until the Device options screen displays. ry 4. Tap Power off to switch off the phone. 5. At the Power off prompt, tap OK. Creating a Samsung Account tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie to lock the touch screen. 2. Press again to display the lock screen then swipe your finger across the screen to unlock. Setting up your Phone with Ready2Go When you turn on your phone for the first time, you will be prompted to setup the AT&T Ready2Go feature. on 2. Touch Get Started to begin. – or – fid en AT&T Ready2Go allows you to quickly and easily setup your phone by using the web browser on your PC. You can set-up email accounts, import contacts, set wallpaper, configure Wi-Fi and many more features. 1. When the Fast & Easy Phone Set-Up screen displays, tap Select Language if you want to change the default language. 12 ta 3. Read and follow the instructions on each screen. Locking and Unlocking the Touch Screen 1. Press Touch Cancel to set up your phone later. You can access Ready2Go by tapping Applications ➔ AT&T Ready2Go An active Samsung account is required to begin accessing applications such as ChatON and AllShare Play. 1. From the home screen, touch and hold the Notification Bar until the pull-down displays, then drag down vertically. For more information, refer to “Notification Bar” on page 45. 2. Tap Samsung account. 3. Tap Create new account. 4. Tap Terms and conditions to read them and tap OK. 5. Tap the I accept all the terms above checkbox. 6. Tap Privacy policy and read the policy and tap OK. 7. Tap Agree. 8. Enter the required information and tap Sign up. 9. At the Welcome screen, tap Next. 10. Follow the on-screen instructions to verify your email address and activate your account. The Add a Google Account screen displays. 2. Tap New to create a new Google account. – or – If you already have a Google account, tap Existing to sign in and add the account to your phone. fid en 3. Follow the on-screen instructions to add a Google Account. Note: Once you have created a Google account, you only need to sign in. on A Google account password is required for Google applications. If you misplace or forget your Google Account password, follow these instructions to retrieve it: 1. From your computer, use an Internet browser and navigate to http://google.com/accounts. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie If you did not create a new account during the setup procedure when you first turned your phone on, follow these steps: 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Gmail Retrieving your Google Account Password ry In order to utilize your device to the fullest extent, you will need to create a Google™ Account when you first use your device. With a Google Account, Google applications will always be in sync between your phone and computer. ta Creating a New Google Account 2. Click on the Can’t access your account? link. 3. Tap the I forgot my password radio button. 4. Enter your Email address and click Continue. 5. Follow the password recovery procedure. Setting Up Your Voice Mail 1. From the Home screen, tap , then tap 2. Follow the tutorial to create a password, record a greeting, and record your name. Note: These steps may be different depending on your network. Getting Started 13 Accessing Your Voice Mail 1. From the Home screen, tap , then tap Accessing Your Voice Mail From Another Phone 1. Dial your wireless phone number. 2. When you hear your voicemail greeting, press the asterisk key on the phone you are using. 3. Enter your password. Troubleshooting If your device has fatal errors, hangs up, or freezes, you may need to reset the device to regain functionality. If your device is frozen and unresponsive, press and hold the Power/Lock Key for 8 to 10 seconds. 14 on fid en 䡲 ta tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie 2. When connected, follow the voice prompts from the voice mail center. ry You may be prompted to enter a password. Section 2: Understanding Your Phone Your phone is lightweight, easy-to-use and offers many useful features. The following list outlines a few of the features included in your phone. • 4G LTE network with 1.5 gigahertz quad-core processor • Android v 4.1.1, Jelly Bean Platform • Brilliant 5.5” HD sAMOLED plus display • Touch screen provides quick response to a variety of in-phone menus and options including applications and seven home screens on fid en • Virtual (on-screen) QWERTY keyboard • Ready access to the Internet • Built-in Bluetooth and advanced Wi-Fi® technology • USB Tethering-capable • Mobile Hotspot Capability ry Facing camera • AT&T GPS Navigation functionality provides real-time navigation • HSDPA 7.2 mbps high speed download capability • Up to 32 GB expandable memory slot • 16 GB memory and 2 GB RAM • Corporate and Personal Email • Sync and update social network applications • Over 450,000 Apps available to download via Google Play ta Features of Your Phone • 8 Megapixel camera and camcorder with 2 Megapixel Front tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie This section outlines some key features of your phone and describes the screen and the icons that appear when the phone is in use. It also shows how to navigate through the phone and provides information on using a memory card. Store™ • Access to Movies and TV Shows with Samsung Media Hub • Full Integration of Google Mobile™ Services (Gmail, YouTube, Google Maps, Google Voice Search) • Multiple Messaging Options: Text/Picture/Video Messaging, and Instant Messaging with Google Talk™ • DivX Certified® to play DivX® video up to HD 1080p, including premium content • AllShare™ Play to share your media content across DLNA certified devices Understanding Your Phone 15 13 12 2. External speaker: allows you to hear the caller. 11 3. Application icons: you can place shortcuts to your favorite applications on the Home screen. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie 10 on fid en 16 ta 1. Status light: displays red when charging, green when fully charged, blue when powering up, and orange when a notification has arrived. ry Front View of Your Phone 4. Primary shortcuts: allows quick access to important features such as Phone, Contacts, Messaging, Internet, and Apps. For more information, refer to “Primary Shortcuts” on page 22. 5. Menu key: allows you to access sub-menus with additional options for different features and applications such as Home screen, Phone, Contacts, Messaging, and Web. 6. Home key: allows you to return to the main Home screen from any Home screen or menu. Press and hold to display Task Manager. Quickly press twice to activate the S Voice application. 7. Back key: allows you step backwards when navigating a menu or web page. 8. Home screen indicator: shows which Home screen is presently displayed. Side Views of Your Phone ry 9. Google Quick Search bar: a shortcut to Google Search that allows you to search for items on the internet. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie ta 10. AccuWeather screen: displays Time, Day, Date, Temperature and weather conditions for your area. 11. Indicator icons: shows the information needed to operate your phone, such as the received signal strength, phone battery level, time, unread Emails, missed calls, etc. 12. Front facing camera: allows you to take pictures of yourself when you set the camera shooting mode to Self shot. on fid en 13. Proximity and Light sensors: uses the ambient light level to adjust keypad access. If the light path is blocked, for example, when holding the phone close to your ear, the touch screen will turn off. Understanding Your Phone 17 Rear View of Your Phone ry tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie ta 1. 3.5mm Headset jack: allows you to plug in headphones. 2. Volume keys: allow you to adjust the ringer volume while in standby mode or adjust the voice volume during a call. When receiving an incoming call, briefly press down either volume key ( ) to mute the ring tone. Adjusts text size when reading a message or using the browser in the Apps folder. 3. Microphone: allows other callers to hear you when you are speaking to them. It is also used for the Speakerphone. 4. Power/Accessory Interface connector: allows you to connect a Travel Charger or other optional accessories such as a USB/data cable or a hands-free headset for convenient, hands-free conversations. fid en 5. Power/Lock key: ( ) lets you power your phone on and off. Also allows you to lock or unlock the touch screen. For more information on locking your phone, see “Locking and Unlocking the Phone” on page 36. 18 on 6. Microphone: used for noise cancellation and stereo recording. 1. Camera lens: is used to take pictures and shoot videos. 2. External speaker: allows you to hear when the Speakerphone is turned on. 3. Flash: is used to provide adequate light when taking pictures in dark places. Removing the S Pen from your Phone The S Pen is stored in your phone to make it easier to keep track of. To remove the S Pen, follow these steps: 1. Use your fingernail or a sharp object to pull the end of the S Pen out of the phone (1). tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie ta The S Pen is a stylus that assists you in performing different functions. By using the Pen button, you can minimize having to switch between touch and pen input. ry S Pen fid en 1. Pen button: by pressing the Pen button, you can add functionality to the S Pen. For more information, refer to “Using the S Pen” on page 20. on 2. Stylus tip: the tip of the S Pen is used for tapping the screen. 2. Pull the S Pen out of the phone (2). Understanding Your Phone 19 Using the S Pen Menu Button To display the menu from any screen, hold the S Pen button and touch and drag the screen as shown in the illustration below. The menu displays. ry There are several different functions you can perform by using the S Pen. Back Button tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie ta To move to a previous screen, hold the S Pen button and touch and drag the screen as shown in the illustration below. The previous screen displays. Press S Pen button 20 on fid en Press S Pen button Screen Capture To take a screen capture, hold the S Pen button and press and hold the S Pen anywhere on the screen. Files are saved in the My Files ➔ sdcard0 ➔ Screenshots folder. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie ta S Note Lite is an application that you can launch from any screen to take quick notes or jot down ideas. To open S Note Lite, hold the S Pen button and double-tap the screen. ry Launch S Note Lite on fid en To access the full S Note application, see “S Note” on page 195. Understanding Your Phone 21 Air view When you hold the S Pen near the screen, a pointer appears on the screen. Move the pointer to files, subjects, or options to preview the contents or view information in pop-up windows. ta To write on a screen capture, use the pen to draw or write. Files are saved in the My files ➔ sdcard0 ➔ Screenshots ➔ IMG_Edited folder. ry Write on any Screen after Capture tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie You can scroll through panels or lists by moving the pointer to an edge (top/bottom/left/right) of the screen. Display Layout Your display screen provides a wealth of information about the phone’s status and options, as well as providing access to application icons. For more information, refer to “Front View of Your Phone” on page 16. Primary Shortcuts 22 on fid en ** For information on using your S Pen with the S Note application, see “S Note” on page 195. There are four non-movable Application Shortcuts that appear at the bottom of all Home screens. The default shortcuts are: • Phone for dialing a number. • Messaging for creating and viewing Messages. • S Note for creating notes using the keypad or S Pen. • Internet for surfing the Internet. • Apps for accessing the applications on your phone. Displays when there is a system error or alert. For more information, refer to “Adding and Removing Primary Shortcuts” on page 40. Displays when the S pen has been removed from the phone. ta ry You can change the Phone, Messaging, S Note, and Internet application shortcuts to any icon that is displayed in the Apps menu. Displays when a call is in progress. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Indicator Icons This list identifies the symbols you’ll see on your phone’s display and Indicator area: Displays your current signal strength. The greater the number of bars, the stronger the signal. Displays when a call is on hold. Displays when the speakerphone is on. Indicates that the Airplane Mode is active. You cannot send or receive any calls or access online information. Displays when a call has been missed. Displays when there is no SIM card in the phone. Displays when a call has been muted. fid en Displays when there is no network available. on Displays when your phone is in Blocking mode. Displays when Call forwarding is set to Always forward. For more information, refer to “Call forwarding” on page 62. Displays your battery charge level. Icon shown is fully charged. Understanding Your Phone 23 ry Displays when your phone is downloading or has downloaded a file. It will blink green when it is installing. Displays when the an outbound file transfer is in progress. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Device Power Very Low – Shows your current battery only has between 5 and 15 percent power remaining. Displays when your phone is communicating with the 4G LTE network. ta Displays when your battery is charging. Also displays battery charge level. Device Power Critical – Shows your current battery only has less than 5 percent power remaining and will immediately shutdown. Displays when your connection to an EDGE network is active. Displays when your phone is communicating with the EDGE network. Displays when your connection to a UTMS, HSDPA, HSPA, or HSPA+ network is active. fid en Displays when your phone is communicating with the UTMS, HSDPA, HSPA, or HSPA+ network. 24 on Displays when your connection to a 4G LTE network is active. Displays when a Play Store download has completed. Displays when updates are available for download. Displays when the phone is connected to a computer via a supported USB cable connection. Displays when the phone is tethered via a supported USB cable connection. Displays when a new text or multimedia message is received. Displays when a new voice mail is received. Displays when Wi-Fi is active but there is a communication issue with the target Wireless Access Point (WAP). tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Displays when you set an alarm to ring at a specified time. For more information, refer to “Alarm” on page 180. ry Displays when the time and date for a Calendar Event has arrived. For more information, refer to “Calendar” on page 178. Displays when Wi-Fi is connected, active, and communicating with a Wireless Access Point (WAP). ta Displays when Email is received. Displays when the Sound profile is set to Mute. Displays when Wi-Fi Direct is active and your phone is connected to another device. Displays when your phone as been configured as a portable Wi-Fi hotspot. Displays when the Sound profile is set to Vibrate. Displays when Bluetooth is activated. fid en Displays when a Bluetooth device has been paired with the phone. on Displays briefly when Bluetooth is on but is not connected to a Bluetooth device. Displays when your phone is connected to a PC using Kies air. Displays when your phone is connected to a Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) certified device using the AllShare Play application. Displays when GPS is active and acquiring a signal. Understanding Your Phone 25 ry Displays when you have not yet set up a Samsung Account. Displays when an emergency call is taking place. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Displays when your phone is connecting to the Device Management server when you first turn on your phone. Displays when the keypad is active. ta Displays when data synchronization and application sync is active and synchronization is in progress for Gmail, Calendar, and Contacts. Displays when your device is connected being used to control streaming media and is connected to a Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) certified device using the AllShare Play application. Displays when a file is being uploaded or sync’d between your device and an external Web storage location. Displays when the uploaded or transferred file was successfully delivered. fid en Displays when TTY device has been inserted. 26 on Displays when a screen capture has been taken. For more details on configuring your phone’s settings, see “Changing Your Settings” on page 119. Application Icons The Apps menu provides quick access to the items you use most frequently. The following table contains a description of each application. If the application is already described in another section of this user manual, then a cross reference to that particular section is provided. For information on navigating through the Apps icons, see “Navigating Through the Application Menus” on page 37. 1. From the Home screen, tap , then tap one of the application icons. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions. The following applications are available: AT&T Navigator: AT&T Navigator provides you with access to real-time GPS-driven applications. These programs not only allow you to achieve turn-by-turn navigation, but also access local searches based on a variety of category parameters. For more information, refer to “AT&T Navigator” on page 177. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie AllShare Play: AllShare Play allows your phone to stream photos, music and videos from its memory to other Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) certified devices. Your phone can also play digital content streamed from other DLNA certified devices. For more information, refer to “AllShare Play” on page 171. AT&T Locker: AT&T Locker allows you to store, share, and sync all of your photos, videos, and documents in one safe, convenient place; the AT&T cloud. For more information, refer to “AT&T Locker” on page 85. ry ta 3. To return to the main Home screen, tap AT&T Code Scanner: AT&T Code Scanner allows you to scan 2D (QR and datamatrix codes) and 1D (UPC and EAN) barcodes found in magazines, stores, and online. For more information, refer to “AT&T Code Scanner” on page 175. on fid en AT&T FamilyMap: provides peace of mind by being able to conveniently locate a family member from your wireless phone or PC and know that your family's location information is secure and private. For more information, refer to “AT&T FamilyMap” on page 176. AT&T Ready2Go: AT&T Ready2Go allows you to quickly and easily setup your phone by using the web browser on your PC. You can set-up email accounts, import contacts, set wallpaper, configure Wi-Fi and many more features. For more information, refer to “Setting up your Phone with Ready2Go” on page 12. AT&T Smart Wi-Fi: With AT&T Smart Wi-Fi, you can maximize your battery performance, maximize your data, simplify access to AT&T Hot Spots and Wi-Fi networks, automate your Wi-Fi connections, and track your data use. For more information, refer to “AT&T Smart Wi-Fi” on page 164. Understanding Your Phone 27 ry Clock: The Clock application allows you to access alarms, view the World Clock, set a stopwatch, use a timer, and setup a Desk Clock. For more information, refer to “Clock” on page 180. ta Calculator: Using this feature you can use the phone as a calculator. The calculator provides the basic arithmetic functions; addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division. You can also use this as a scientific calculator. For more information, refer to “Calculator” on page 178. Camera: Use your 8.0 megapixel camera feature to produce photos and videos. For more information, refer to “Camera” on page 95. DeviceHelp: DeviceHelp provides online information to help with your device questions. For more information, refer to “DeviceHelp” on page 183. ChatON: With the ChatON application, you can interact with friends and family with text, images, hand-written notes and video shared instantly. You can also chat in groups. For more information, refer to “ChatON” on page 180. Downloads: The Downloads application allows you to manage all of your downloads from the Play Store and the Browser. For more information, refer to “Downloads” on page 183. 28 on fid en tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Calendar: With the Calendar application, you can consult the calendar by day, week, month, year, create events, and set an alarm to act as a reminder, if necessary. For more information, refer to “Calendar” on page 178. Contacts: You can manage your daily contacts by storing their name and number in your Address Book. Address Book entries can be sorted by name, entry, or group. You can also synchronize your phone Address Book with AT&T Address Book, the network backup service. For more information, refer to “Contacts and Your Address Book” on page 72. ry Google +: Google+ makes messaging and sharing with your friends a lot easier. You can set up Circles of friends, visit the Stream to get updates from your Circles, use Messenger for fast messaging with everyone in your Circles, or use Instant Upload to automatically upload videos and photos to your own private album on Google+. For more information, refer to “Google +” on page 114. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Flipboard: This application creates a personalized digital magazine out of everything being shared with you. Access news stories, personal feeds and other related material. For more information, refer to “Flipboard” on page 184. Google: The Google Search application is the same onscreen Internet search engine that is on the Google Search Bar on your main Home screen. For more information, see “Google Search Bar” on page 33. ta Email: Email enables you to review and create email using various email services. You can also receive text message alerts when you receive an important email. For more information, refer to “Using Email” on page 111. Gallery: The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos. For photos, you can also perform basic editing tasks, view a slideshow, set photos as wallpaper or contact image, and share as a picture message. For more information, refer to “Gallery” on page 93. on fid en Gmail: Gmail is a web-based email service. Gmail is configured when you first set up your phone. Depending on your synchronization settings, Gmail can automatically synchronize with your Gmail account on the web. For more information, refer to “Using Gmail” on page 113. Group Cast: While you are viewing documents, photos, videos, and music, you can share them real-time with your friends. For more information, refer to “AllShare Play Screen Sharing via Group Cast” on page 175. Help: The Help app provides additional information on Learning the basics, Changing important settings, Use Key applications, and Help settings. For more information, refer to “Help” on page 185. Understanding Your Phone 29 ry tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Kies air: Kies air allows you to sync your Windows PC wirelessly with your phone provided they are both on the same Wi-Fi network. You can view call logs, videos, photos, bookmarks, IMs, and even send SMS messages from your home computer. For more information, refer to “Kies air” on page 169. Maps: Depending on your location, you can view basic, custom, and satellite maps and local business information, including locations, contact information, and driving directions. You can also post public messages about a location and track your friends. For more information, refer to “Maps” on page 187. ta Internet: Open the web browser to start surfing the web. The browser is fully optimized and comes with advanced functionality to enhance the Internet browsing feature on your phone. For more information, refer to “Internet” on page 154. Latitude: With Google Latitude, you can see the location of all of your friends on a map or on a list. You can also share or hide your location. For more information, refer to “Latitude” on page 185. 30 on fid en Local: Local is an application that uses Google Maps and your location to help you find Restaurants, Cafes, Bars, Attractions, and more. You can also add your own locations. For more information, refer to “Local” on page 187. Media Hub: Samsung Media Hub is your one stop for the hottest movie and TV content. You can rent or purchase your favorite content and watch from the convenience of anywhere. For more information, refer to “Media Hub” on page 85. Messages: AT&T Messages brings your texts, calls, and voicemail messages together into a single conversation thread and is accessible by phone or computer. For more information, refer to “Messages App” on page 115. Messaging: You can send and receive different types of messages. For more information, refer to “Messaging” on page 104. myAT&T: myAT&T allows you to manage your own AT&T account. You can review and pay your bill, check minutes and data usage, upgrade to a new device, or change your rate plan. For more information, refer to “myAT&T” on page 190. Mobile Hotspot: This application allows you to share your phones’s mobile data connection as a portable Wi-Fi hotspot. For more information, refer to “Tethering & portable hotspot” on page 123. Navigation: Navigation is an internet-connected GPS navigation system with voice guidance. You can type or speak your destination. For more information, refer to “Navigation” on page 191. Music Hub: This app lets you upload your music collection to the cloud, stream and purchase songs from an extensive catalog, and listen to personal radio. For more information, refer to “Music Hub” on page 87. Paper Artist: Provides access to an in-device graphics program.For more information, refer to “Paper Artist” on page 193. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie ta ry Messenger: Messenger allows you to bring groups of friends together into a simple group conversation. When you get a new conversation in Messenger, Google+ sends an update to your phone. For more information, refer to “Messenger” on page 115. fid en Music Player: Music Player allows you to play music files that you have stored on your phone and memory card. You can also create playlists. For more information, refer to “Music Player” on page 88. on My Files: My Files allows you to manage your sounds, images, videos, bluetooth files, Android files, and other memory card data in one convenient location. For more information, refer to “My Files” on page 189. Phone: Allows you to access the dialer keypad, call logs, and favorites. For more information, refer to “Call Functions” on page 48. Play Books: With Google Play Books, you can find more than 3 million free e-books and hundreds of thousands more to buy in the eBookstore. For more information, refer to “Play Books” on page 193. Understanding Your Phone 31 Polaris Office 4.0: Polaris® Office 4.0 is a Microsoft Office compatible office suite. This application provides a central place for managing your documents online or offline. For more information, refer to “Polaris Office 4.0” on page 195. Play Movies & TV: With Google Play Movies & TV, you can rent thousands of different movies and television shows. You can watch instantly, or download your movie or show for offline viewing at a later time. For more information, refer to “Play Movies & TV” on page 93. S Note: The S Note application allows you to create notes using the keypad, the S Pen tool, or both. You can add images, voice recordings, and text all in one place. For more information, refer to “S Note” on page 195. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie ta ry Play Magazines: With Google Play Magazines, you can subscribe to your favorite magazines and have them available to read on your phone at any time or any place. For more information, refer to “Play Magazines” on page 194. Play Music: With the Music application, while online, you can play music that you have added to your music file as well as any music you copied from your PC. While offline, you can listen to music you have copied from your PC. For more information, refer to “Google Play Music” on page 91. 32 on fid en Play Store: The Play Store provides access to downloadable applications and games to install on your phone. For more information, refer to “Play Store” on page 194. S Suggest: This application recommends popular applications when connected to a Wi-Fi network. All recommended applications are guaranteed to be compatible with your device. For more information, refer to “S Suggest” on page 195. S Voice: With the S Voice application you can use your voice to perform operations that you would normally have to do by hand such as dialing a phone number, texting a message, playing music, etc. For more information, refer to “S Voice” on page 196. ry YPmobile: The YPmobile (Yellowpages) application provides quick and ready access to businesses, map locations, and storage of your favorite searches. This application allows you to tap into local businesses, locations, and events, connecting you to your search in real-time. For more information, refer to “YPmobile” on page 199. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Talk: Google Talk is a free Windows and web-based application for instant messaging offered by Google. Conversation logs are automatically saved to a Chats area in your Gmail account. This allows you to search a chat log and store them in your Gmail accounts. For more information, refer to “Google Talk” on page 114. YouTube: YouTube is a video sharing website on which users can upload and share videos, and view them in MPEG-4 format. For more information, refer to “YouTube” on page 198. ta Settings: This icon navigates to the sound and phone settings for your phone. It includes such settings as: display, security, memory, and any extra settings associated with your phone. For more information, refer to “Changing Your Settings” on page 119. Video Player: The Video Player application plays video files stored on your microSD card. For more information, refer to “Video Player” on page 92. fid en Voice Recorder: The Voice Recorder allows you to record an audio file up to one minute long and then immediately send it as a message. For more information, refer to “Voice Recorder” on page 197. on Voice Search: The Google Voice Search application allows you to search the web using only your voice. For more information, refer to “Voice Search” on page 198. Tip: To open applications quickly, add the icons of frequentlyused applications to the Home screen or to the folders you created. For details, see “Customizing Your Home Screen” on page 39. Google Search Bar The Google Search Bar provides you an on-screen Internet search engine powered by Google™. 1. From the main home screen, tap the Google Search bar Understanding Your Phone 33 Tap Lightly touch items to select or launch them. For example: • Tap the on screen keyboard to enter characters or text. • Tap a menu item to select it. • Tap an application’s icon to launch the application. ta 3. Tap to use Google Voice Search. For more information, refer to “S Voice” on page 196. Terms used in this user manual ry 2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the item you want to search for, then tap tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Menu Navigation You can tailor the phone’s range of functions to fit your needs using both menus and widgets. Menus, sub-menus, and features can be accessed by scrolling through the available on-screen menus. Your phone originally has three home screens but you can expand up to seven home screens. Touch and Hold Activate on-screen items by a touch and hold gesture. For example: • Touch and hold a widget on the home screen to move it. • Touch and hold on a field to display a pop-up menu of options. Command Keys Swipe and Palm Swipe Menu Key To swipe, lightly drag your finger vertically or horizontally across the screen. Use swipe when: • Unlocking the screen Press Home to display the main Home screen. Press and hold to display recently used apps and access the Task manager. Back Key • Scrolling through the Home screen or a menu 34 Back to return to the previous screen, option or on Press step. fid en Press Menu to display a context-sensitive menu of options for the current screen or feature. Home Key To palm swipe, swipe the side of your hand horizontally across the screen. Use palm swipe when: • Capturing the screen Using Gestures ry By activating the various gesture features within the Motion Settings menu, you can access a variety of time saving functions. To activate motion: 1. From the Home screen, press Settings ➔ Motion. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie To pan, touch and hold a selected icon, then move the device to the left or right to reposition it to another page. You must first activate Motion on your device. Use panning to: • Move icons on your Home screens or Application Menus to another page. ta Panning Tilt To activate the tilt feature, press and hold two points on the screen then tilt the device back and forth to reduce or enlarge the screen. Use tilt to: • Reduce or enlarge the screen in the Gallery or Browser. Turn over on fid en Turn your phone over so that the screen faces downward. For example: • Mute incoming calls and playing sounds by turning your phone over. and then tap 2. Tap the ON/OFF icon ON located at the top of the screen to activate motion. 3. Tap the checkboxes located to the right of each motion option to activate the motions you wish. A checkmark will appear. The following is a description of the available gestures: • Quick glance: Once enable, you can check key information at a glance by reaching towards your device. • Direct call: Once enabled, the device will dial the currently displayed on-screen Contact entry as soon as you place the device to your ear. • Smart alert: Once enabled, pickup the device to be alerted and notified of you have missed any calls or messages. Understanding Your Phone 35 • Tilt to zoom: Once enabled, you must be on a screen where on-screen information swiping across the screen. In a single motion, press the side of your hand on the screen and swipe form left to right. The image is then copied to the clipboard. • Palm touch to mute/pause: Once enabled, you can pause any on-screen video or mute any current sound by simply covering the screen with your hand. Once you remove your hand from the screen, the device goes back to normal by either continuing to play the current video or unmuting the current sound. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie content can be zoomed. In a single motion, touch and hold two points on the display then tilt the tilt the device back and forth to zoom in or out. • Palm swipe to capture: Once enabled, you can capture any ry device to be taken to the top of the current on-screen list. ta • Double tap to top: Once enabled, double tap the top of the • Pan to move icon: Once enabled, touch and hold a desired application shortcut icon or widget on the screen. Once it detaches, move the device left or right to migrate it to a new location. • Pan to browse images: Once enabled, touch and hold a desired on-screen image to pan around it. Move the device left or right to pan vertically or up and down to pan horizontally around the large on-screen image. • Shake to update: Once enabled, shake your device to rescan for fid en Bluetooth devices, rescan for Wi-Fi devices, Refresh a Web page, etc. • Turn over to mute/pause: Once enabled, mute incoming calls 36 on and any playing sounds by turning the device display down on a surface. This is the opposite of the Pickup to be Notified Gesture. For more information, refer to “Motion” on page 147. Locking and Unlocking the Phone To unlock your phone: 1. Press the lock button right side of your phone. located on the upper 2. The lock screen will display with Swipe screen to unlock displayed at the bottom of the screen. 3. Swipe the touch screen in any direction. 4. The Home screen will display as shown above. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie The main home screen is the starting point for many applications and functions, and it allows you to add items like application icons, shortcuts, folders, or Google widgets to give you instant access to information and applications. This is the default page and accessible from any menu by pressing Navigating Through the Home Screens Your phone originally has three home screens but you can expand up to seven home screens. If you like, you can place different applications on each of the home screens. fid en From the main Home screen, sweep the screen with your finger in either direction. The main Home Screen is located in the middle with a Home screen on each side. on 䡲 ta Home Screen Overview ry Note: There are several additional ways you can lock your screen. For more information, refer to “Lock Screen Settings” on page 134. Navigating Through the Application Menus Your phone initially has three Application Menus available. Follow these steps to navigate through the Application Menus: 1. At the Home screen, tap . The first Application Menu will be displayed. 2. Sweep the screen left or right to access the other two menus. Understanding Your Phone 37 A sub-menu will appear at the bottom of the phone screen. 3. Tap one of the application icons. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie ta ry 2. Tap an option. Sub-Menu items Note: As you add applications, the number of Application menus that you have available will increase. Navigating Using Sub-Menus 38 on To access a sub-menu: 1. Press fid en Sub-menus are available when you are at any Home screen or have selected a feature or application such as Phone, Contacts, Messaging, or Internet. Accessing Recently-Used Apps 1. Press and hold from any screen to open the recently-used applications window. 2. Tap an icon to open the selected application. – or – You can customize your Home screen by doing the following: • Creating Shortcuts 5. Touch and hold the application icon. This creates an immediate shortcut of the selected icon and closes the Apps tab. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie • Adding and Removing Widgets on the Home Screen • Repositioning Widgets • Creating Folders • Changing the Wallpaper • Adding and Deleting Home Screens to display your current applications. 4. Scroll through the list and locate your desired application. ry Customizing Your Home Screen 3. Tap ta Tap Task manager to go to the Task manager. Creating Shortcuts Shortcuts are different than the current Home screen Widgets that only launch an application. Shortcuts activate a feature, action, or launch an application. fid en Note: To move a shortcut from one screen to another, it must first be deleted from its current screen. Navigate to the new screen, then add the shortcut. on Adding a shortcut from the Apps Menu 1. Press to activate the main Home screen. 2. Navigate to the desired Home Page. 6. While still holding the on-screen icon, position it on the current page. Once complete, release the screen to lock the new shortcut into its new position on the current screen. Adding a shortcut via the Add to Home screen 1. Press to activate the main Home screen. 2. Navigate to the desired Home Page. 3. Touch and hold on an empty area of the Home screen. 4. Tap Apps and widgets, Folder, or Page. 5. Press and hold a shortcut from the available list and position it on the current screen. Deleting a shortcut 1. Press to activate the main Home screen. 2. Touch and hold the desired shortcut. This unlocks it from its location on the current screen. Understanding Your Phone 39 Widgets are self-contained applications that reside in either your Widgets tab or on the main or extended Home screens. Unlike a shortcut, the Widget appears as an on-screen application. Adding a Widget 1. Press to activate the main Home screen. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Note: This action does not delete the shortcut, it just removes it from the current screen. Adding and Removing Widgets ry and release it. As you place the shortcut into the Trash, both items turn red. ta 3. Drag the icon over the Delete icon Adding and Removing Primary Shortcuts You can change any of your primary shortcuts with the exception of the Apps shortcut. 1. Press to activate the main Home screen. 2. Touch and hold the primary shortcut you want to replace, then drag it to an empty space on any Home screen. 3. Scroll through the App menu to find the shortcut you want to add as the new primary short cut. fid en 4. Touch and hold the new shortcut, then drag it to the empty space in the row of primary shortcuts. 40 on The new primary shortcut will now appear on all Home screens. 2. Navigate to the desired Home Page. 3. Touch and hold on an empty area of the screen. 4. Tap Apps and Widgets. 5. Tap the Widgets tab at the top of the screen. 6. Press and hold an available Widget to position it on the current screen, then release the Widget. Removing a Widget 1. Touch and hold a Widget until you can move it around on the screen. 2. Drag the Widget over the Delete icon it. and release As you place the Widget into the Trash, both items turn red. to activate the main Home screen. to display your current applications. 3. Tap the Apps tab at the top of the screen if it is not already selected. 4. Press fid en 8. Touch and drag the icon to the position that you want. To move to a different page, drag the icon to the edge of the page until the page scrolls to the desired page. to return to the Home screen. on 10. Press to display your current applications. 3. Tap the Apps tab at the top of the screen if it is not already selected. and tap Edit. 5. Touch and hold the first application that you would like to move to a folder. 6. Drag the icon down to the Create folder and tap Edit. 7. Scroll through the list and locate the icon you wish to move. 9. Tap Save. 2. Tap 4. Press and tap View type. 5. Tap Customizable grid. A green circle will appear next to the option. 6. Press To create a folder follow these steps: 1. Press to activate the main Home screen. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie 2. Tap You can create application folders to hold similar applications if you wish. ta Moving Icons in the Apps Menu 1. Press Creating Application Folders ry Note: This action does not actually delete the Widget, it just removes it from the current Home screen. icon. 7. Enter a folder name and tap OK. A folder is displayed in the original place of the application icon with the application icon displayed on top of it. You can now drag other Apps into the folder. 8. To view information on an App, drag the App icon up to the App info icon to view information on the application. 9. Tap Save. Understanding Your Phone 41 2. Tap to display your current applications. 4. Press and tap Edit. 5. Touch and hold the first application that you would like to move to a new page. 6. Drag the icon down to the Create page icon. • Live wallpapers: select an animated wallpaper. This option is not available for the Lock screen option. • Wallpapers: select from many still-life wallpapers. 5. Select a wallpaper and tap Set wallpaper, Done, or Cancel. Adding and Deleting Home Screens 7. Tap Save. The app will appear on a new page. Changing the Wallpaper fid en You can change the Wallpaper (background) of your home screens by following these steps: 1. From any Home screen, touch and hold on an empty area of the screen. The Home screen window is displayed. on 2. Tap Set wallpaper for. 42 4. Tap one of the following options: • Gallery: select a wallpaper from photographs you have taken with your camera. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie 3. Tap the Apps tab at the top of the screen if it is not already selected. ry You can add a new page to your application menu by following these steps: 1. Press to activate the main Home screen. 3. Select the location where you would like to change the wallpaper. Tap Home screen, Lock screen, or Home and lock screens. ta Adding a New Page to the Application Menu You can add and delete Home screens. You can have up to seven Home screens. To add a new Home screen: 1. Press to activate the main Home screen. 2. Press and tap Edit page. 3. Tap the Home screen that contains A new screen is added. 4. If desired, touch and hold the new screen and drag it to a different location. 5. Press tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie ta ry 4. Drag it to the trash can located at the bottom of the screen. The page will turn red. to return to the main Home screen. You can now add items to your new Home screen. 2. Press and tap Edit page. fid en To delete a Home screen: 1. Press to activate the main Home screen. on 3. Touch and hold the Home screen you want to delete. 5. If there are items on the Home screen that you want to delete, the Remove home screen page prompt is displayed. 6. Tap OK to delete the page and its contents, otherwise tap Cancel. 7. Press to return to the main Home screen. Understanding Your Phone 43 You can arrange your Home screens in any order that you want. When you move a Home screen, the other Home screens are be re-ordered automatically. ry Moving Home Screens and tap Edit page. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie 2. Press ta To move a Home screen, follow these steps: 1. Press to activate the main Home screen. 3. Touch and hold the Home screen you want to move. fid en 5. Press 4. Drag it to the location that you would like to place it. 44 on In this example, the Dual clock app screen is moved to the last position. to return to the main Home screen. Clearing Notifications fid en tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie On the Home screen, touch and hold the Notification Bar until the pull-down displays, then drag down vertically. on 䡲 To clear all notifications from the Notification panel: 1. From the Home screen, touch and hold the Notification Bar until the pull-down displays, then drag down vertically. ry The Notification Bar includes a pull-down list to show information about processes that are running, recent notifications, and alerts. To display the Status indicator: ta Notification Bar Clear Button 2. Tap the Clear button. The notifications are cleared and the panel closes. Understanding Your Phone 45 Memory Card Your device lets you use a microSD (SD) or microSDHC card to expand available memory space. This secure digital card enables you to exchange images, music, and data between SD-compatible devices. This section addresses the features and options of your device’s SD functionality. The device has a USB SD card mode. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie ta In addition to notifications, this panel also provides quick and ready access to separate device functions. These can be quickly activated or deactivated by toggling them on or off. ry Accessing Additional Panel Functions Mounting the SD Card To store additional photos, music, videos, and other applications, you must mount (install) the SD card prior to use. Mounting the SD card establishes a USB connection with your computer. 1. Insert the SD card into the external, SD card slot. For more information, refer to “Removing and Installing the Memory Card” on page 8. 2. Your SD card is scanned to see the available information on it. 46 on fid en The following functions can either be activated (green) or deactivated (gray): Wi-Fi, GPS, Sound, Screen rotation, Blocking mode, Power saving, Mobile data, Bluetooth, AllShare Cast, and Sync. Unmounting the SD card Unmounting the SD card prevents corruption and damage to the SD card while removing it from the slot. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ Storage. SD card Available Memory Status 4. Tap Delete all to format or press to cancel. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie For more information, refer to “Removing and Installing the Memory Card” on page 8. ry 3. Tap OK. Warning! Performing the next step erases all data stored on the SD card. ta 2. Scroll to the bottom of the display and tap Unmount SD card. To view the memory allocation for your external SD card: 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ Storage. 2. The available memory for Device and SD card displays under the Total space and Available space headings. Erasing Files from the SD card You can erase files from the SD card using the phone. 1. Ensure the SD card is mounted. For more information, refer to “Mounting the SD Card” on page 46. 2. Tap Format SD card. ➔ Settings ➔ fid en 1. From the Home screen, tap Storage. on 3. At the Format SD card confirmation prompt, tap Format SD card. Understanding Your Phone 47 Section 3: Call Functions Displaying Your Phone Number 䡲 Tap ➔ Settings ➔ About device ➔ Status. Your phone number is displayed in the My phone number field. Making a Call 1. From the Home screen, tap and use the on-screen keypad to enter the number you wish to dial. 2. Tap to make the call. on fid en Note: When you activate the Auto redial option in the Voice Call menu, the phone will automatically redial up to 10 times when the person does not answer the call or is already on the phone. For more information, refer to “Call Settings” on page 59. 48 ry 1. From the Home screen, tap , then touch and hold . The + character appears. 2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the country code, area code, and phone number. • If you make a mistake, tap until the desired numbers have been deleted. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie For more information, refer to “Sound Settings” on page 129. Making an International Call ta This section describes how to make or answer a call. It also includes the features and functionality associated with making or answering a call. 3. Tap to make the call. Manual Pause Dialing To manually call a number with pause(s) without storing it in your Contacts list: and use the on-screen 1. From the Home screen, tap keypad to enter the phone number. 2. Press to display the dialer sub-menu. 3. Tap Add 3-sec pause to add a three second pause, and use the keypad to enter the additional numbers. Tip: You can create pauses longer than three seconds by entering multiple three second pauses. to make the call. Making Emergency Calls Correcting an Entered Number Use the following steps to correct a mis-typed entry when dialing. After entering a number using the keypad: • If you make a mistake, tap to erase a single character. • Press and hold to erase the entire string of numbers. Ending a Call 䡲 Tap the Without a SIM card, you can only make an emergency call with the phone; normal cell phone service is not available. Making an Emergency Call without a SIM card 1. Tap Emergency call from the on-screen display to make an emergency call. 2. Enter 9-1-1 and tap . Complete your call. During this type of call, you will have access to the Speaker mode, Keypad, and End Call features. key. Dialing a Recent Number on fid en All incoming, outgoing and missed calls are recorded in the Call log. If the number or caller is listed in your Address Book, the associated name also displayed. 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Tap the Logs tab. If you do not have a SIM card installed the first time you turn on the phone, the Insert SIM card to make calls message displays and an animated tutorial shows you how to install the SIM card. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie For more information, refer to “Adding Pauses to Contact Numbers” on page 74. 䡲 3. Tap the desired Contact to enter the Details page, then tap to make a call. ta 5. Tap A list of recent calls is displayed. ry 4. Select Add wait to add a wait. A wait will pause the calling sequence until you enter a number or press a key. 3. Tap to exit this calling mode. Making an Emergency Call with a SIM card The Emergency calling mode makes redialing an emergency number a 1-tap process. Before you can resume normal calling operations, you should first exit this mode. Call Functions 49 . Making a Call Using Speed Dial Note: This mode can drain your battery power more rapidly than a normal calling mode. 4. At the Emergency Callback screen: • Tap to callback 911 with a single tap. • Touch and slide to the right to exit this mode. on fid en • Touch and slide to the left return to the Home screen. This allows you to access other applications while staying in this mode. 50 2. Press to display the Contacts List sub-menu. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie 3. Complete your call. During this type of call, you will have access to the Speaker mode, Keypad, and End Call features. • After completing your emergency call, appears in the Notification area until you exit the Emergency calling mode. You can assign a short cut number to a phone number in your Contacts List for speed dialing. 1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts to display your Contacts List. ry ta 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Enter the emergency number (ex: 911) and then tap 3. Tap Speed dial setting. 4. The Speed dial setting screen displays showing the numbers 1 through 100. The number 1 is reserved for Voicemail. 5. Tap an unused number and the Select contact screen displays. 6. Select a contact to assign to the number. The selected contact number will display in the speed dial number box. 7. To remove a speed dial number or change the order, press to display the Speed dial setting sub-menu. 8. Tap Change order or Remove. ➔ Keypad 9. To make a call using Speed Dial, tap and from the Dialer, touch and hold the speed dial number. Making a Call from the Address Book – or – You can store phone numbers that you use regularly on the SIM card or in the phone’s memory. These entries are collectively called the Address Book. – or – ry – Tap Create new message to compose a new message. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie be reminded. ta – Tap Remind me later and then set a time that you would like to For further details about the Address Book feature, see “Finding an Address Book Entry” on page 76. Answering a Call When a call is received the phone rings and displays the caller’s phone number, or name if stored in the Address Book. 1. At the incoming call screen: • Touch and drag in any direction to answer the call. • Touch and drag in any direction to reject the call and send it to your voicemail. on – I’m driving – I’m at the cinema – I’m in class – I’m in a meeting – Sorry, I’m busy. Call back later. fid en • Touch and drag the Reject call with message tab upward and tap a predefined text message to send to the caller. 2. Tap to end the call. Call Functions 51 Dialing Options • Logs: displays a list of all dialed, received, and missed calls. • Favorites: displays your contacts that you have marked as ry 2. Tap the Logs tab. A list of recent calls is displayed. If the number or caller is listed in your Address Book, the associated name is displayed. All calls made, received, and missed are listed. Types of calls are identified by the following icons: • Incoming Calls: • Outgoing Calls: Favorites. • Contacts: takes you to your Address Book where you can select a contact to call. on fid en After you begin to enter numbers, the Add to Contacts option appears so you can save the Contact if needed. 52 The phone stores the numbers of the calls you’ve dialed, received, or missed in the Call log. The Call log displays the details of the call. 1. From the Home screen, tap tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie From the Home screen and Application menus, you have the option to access the Dialer and initiate a call by tapping ➔ Keypad. From the Dialer and the Contacts screen, the following tabs are located at the top of your screen: • Keypad: dials the current number entered using the on-screen keypad. Call Log ta Note: You can answer a call while using the Address Book or other menu feature. After ending the call, the phone returns to the previously active function screen. • Missed Calls: • Rejected Calls: • Auto Rejected Calls: Calling Back a Missed Call ry The number of calls you have missed is displayed on the Home screen. 1. Touch the missed call icon with the number of missed calls on it and move it in any direction. 2. The Call log is displayed. Missed calls are identified by the icon next to the number. To call back a missed call number: 1. From the Home screen, tap ta Viewing Missed Calls from the Lock Screen ➔ Logs. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie A list of recent calls is displayed. If the number or caller is listed in your Address Book, the associated name is displayed. 2. Swipe the desired missed call to the right to call. – or – Swipe the desired missed call to the left to message. Saving a Recent Call to your Address Book 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Logs. A list of recent calls is displayed. fid en 2. Tap the call you want to save to your Address Book. on Note: If there is a voicemail sent by the same number, associated icons are displayed and can then be selected. 3. The call detail page is displayed. Tap Create contact to add the call to your Address Book. The Create contact screen is displayed. – or – Call Functions 53 Call the number ry 3. At the Message screen, tap the empty text field and use the on-screen keypad to type in a message. 4. When you are done with your message, tap send. to For more information, refer to “Creating and Sending Messages” on page 104. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Add as new contact Update an existing contact Send a message 2. Swipe the entry you want to message to the left. ta If you want to replace the number for an existing contact, tap Update existing. Deleting a Call from the Call Log 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Logs. A list of recent calls is displayed. 2. Touch and hold the call you want to delete from the Call log. 3. Tap Delete. 4. Enter information into the various fields using the keypad. fid en 5. Tap Save to save when you are finished. For further details about the Address Book feature, see “Adding a New Contact” on page 73. Sending a Message to a Recent Call ➔ Logs. on 1. From the Home screen, tap A list of recent calls is displayed. 54 4. At the Delete prompt, tap OK. The call is deleted from the Call log. Adding a Call to the Reject List 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Logs. A list of recent calls is displayed. 2. Touch and hold the call you want to add to the Reject List. 3. Tap Add to reject list. Adjusting the Call Volume 䡲 Press the Up volume key to increase the volume level and press the Down volume key to decrease the volume level. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Logs. ➔ Call duration. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Call Duration 2. Press During a call, to adjust the earpiece volume, use the Volume keys on the left side of the phone. ta Future calls from this number will be rejected and sent to your voicemail. ry 4. At the Add to reject list prompt, tap OK. 3. The following times are displayed for Voice and Data: • Last call: shows the length of time for the last call. • Dialed calls: shows the total length of time for all calls made. • Received calls: shows the total length of time for all calls received. • All calls: shows the total length of time for all calls made and received. Options During a Call fid en 4. You may reset these times to zero by pressing then tapping Reset. on Your phone provides a number of control functions that you can use during a call. From the Home screen, you can also adjust the ringer volume using these same keys. In-Call Options During an active call there are several functions available by tapping a corresponding on-screen button. • Hold: place the current active call on hold. • Add call: displays the dialer so you can call another person. • Keypad: displays the on-screen keypad, where you can enter number using DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency). • End call: terminates the call. • Speaker: routes the phone’s audio through either the speaker or through the earpiece. – Tap Speaker to route the audio through the speaker. (You can adjust the speaker volume using the volume keys.) A green line will appear under the Speaker button. Call Functions 55 Placing a Call on Hold ry You can place the current call on hold at any point during a conversation. You can also make another call while you have a call in progress if your network supports this service. Hold . This action places 1. While on a call, tap Hold the current caller on hold. 56 on fid en tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie the Speakerphone During an Active Call” on page 58). The green line will disappear when Speaker is not activated. • Mute/Unmute turn the onboard microphone either on or off. – Tap Mute during a call to mute the microphone. A green line will appear under the Mute button. – Tap Mute again to unmute the microphone. The green line will disappear when Mute is not activated. • Headset connects to a Bluetooth headset. – Tap Headset during a call to activate a Bluetooth headset. A green line will appear under the Headset button. – Tap Headset again to de-activate the Bluetooth headset. The green line will disappear when the Headset is not activated. • Press for more options: – Contacts: allows you to go to your Contact list. – Memo: allows you to jot down a memo during a call. – Noise Suppression On/Off: allows you to turn on the Noise Suppression feature when you are in a noisy area. Turn it Off when not needed to conserve battery power. – In-call sound EQ: assigns a sound equalizer preset for use during an active call. Sometimes you might need the sound to be softer, clearer, or optimized for one ear or the other. ta – Tap Speaker again to use the phone’s earpiece (see “Using 2. You can later reactivate this call by tapping Unhold Unhold . To make a new call while you have a call in progress Hold . 1. Tap Hold 2. Tap Add call to display the dialer. 3. Enter the new number and tap Once connected, the active call will appear in a large box at the top of your screen and the call on hold will appear in a smaller box in the middle of your screen. 2. Tap to end the currently active call. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie The current call (caller #2) is placed on hold and the previous call on hold (caller #1) is then reactivated so that you can continue conversing with that person. The active call will appear in a green box. To end a specific call 1. Tap Swap until the call you want to end appears in a green box. 2. Tap to end the specific call. 3. Tap to end the remaining call. fid en To answer a call while you have a call in progress 1. Tap and slide to the right to answer another call. 2. Tap Putting "Name/Number" on hold to put the first call on hold. – or – on 3. To switch between the two calls, tap Swap. • Swap: Places the current call on hold and then activates the previous call. The active call will appear in a green box. Tap Swap again to switch back. ry When you have an active call and a call on hold, you may switch between the two calls, changing the one on hold to active and placing the other on hold. 1. Tap Swap. Tap Ending call with "Name/Number" to end the first call. ta Switching Between Calls To end a call on hold 1. Tap to disconnect the active call. 2. The call on hold will now become the active call. Tap to end the call. 3-Way Calling (Multi-Party Calling) The 3-Way or Multi-Party feature allows you to answer a series of incoming calls and place them on hold. If this service is supported by the network, all calls can be joined together. You are notified of an incoming call by a call waiting tone. Note: The Merge option combines all of the calls you have established with your phone (both active and on hold). Swap places the current call on hold and then activates the previous call. Call Functions 57 and slide to the right to answer the next call. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie 3. Tap Putting "Number" on hold to put the first call on hold. ta 2. Tap ry This feature joins all of the calls you have established with your phone (both active and on hold) into a multi-party call. 1. Tap and slide to the right to answer the call. 4. Join the first two callers into a single multi-party call by tapping Merge Merge 5. To temporarily leave the conference call, tap Hold Hold . To rejoin the conference call tap Unhold 6. Tap to end the call. Unhold Using the Speakerphone During an Active Call While in an active call, it is possible to enable the speakerphone feature. 1. Tap Speaker fid en Speaker 58 on The Speaker button now appears as speakerphone is activated. Speaker and the 2. Use the Volume keys (located on the left side of your phone) to adjust the volume. 3. To deactivate the speakerphone, tap Speaker Speaker Important! For more information, see “Responsible Listening” on page 214. Searching for a Number in Address Book To mute your phone during a call 1. Tap Mute Mute The Mute button now appears as activated. Mute For further details about the Address Book feature, see “Finding an Address Book Entry” on page 76. Call Waiting and Mute is The Call Waiting feature allows you to answer an incoming call while you have a call in progress, if this service is supported by the network, and you must first activate the Call Waiting feature: 䡲 to deactivate the Mute function and 2. Tap Mute reactivate the microphone. Mute Bluetooth headset 1. Tap Headset Headset then tap Contacts. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Example: You wish to say something to person in the room, but do not want the person on the phone to hear you. 1. During the active call, press 2. Tap the Address Book entry. ry You can temporarily switch your phone’s microphone off, so that the other person cannot hear you. ta Switching off the Microphone (Mute) From the Home screen, tap ➔ ➔ Additional settings ➔Call waiting. ➔ Call settings You are notified of an incoming call by a call waiting tone. Call Settings fid en 2. The phone will scan for your Bluetooth headset. When found, connect to the headset. The Headset button now appears as Bluetooth headset is activated. Headset and the To access the Call settings menu: 䡲 From the Home screen, tap settings. ➔ ➔ Call Headset on 3. Tap Headset to deactivate the Bluetooth headset and reactivate the phone speaker. Call Functions 59 3. Tap Save to save the reject message. Call rejection 1. From the Call settings screen, tap Call rejection. Ringtones and keypad tones 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ ➔ Ringtones and keypad tones. 3. Tap Auto reject mode and tap one of the following options: • All numbers: to reject all calls. 2. Tap Device ringtone, select a ringtone, and tap OK. 5. Tap to manually add numbers to the Reject list. 6. Tap Unknown, to create a checkmark and automatically reject all calls that are not in your Contacts list. Set reject messages 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Set reject messages. ➔ Call settings to manually add a reject message. on Tap one of the pre-written messages to be displayed when you want the call to be rejected. You can edit the message if desired. 60 ta 4. Tap Incoming call vibration to create a checkmark if you want your phone to vibrate when a call is incoming. 5. Tap Keytones to create a checkmark if you want tones to play when the keypad is pressed. Call alert ➔ fid en 2. Tap – or – ➔ Call settings 3. Tap Device vibration, select a vibration type, and tap OK. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie • Auto reject numbers: to reject all calls in your Reject list. 4. Tap Auto reject list. ry 2. Tap the OFF / ON icon to turn Auto reject mode on ON . 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Call alert. ➔ ➔ Call settings 2. Tap Call vibrations to enable your phone to vibrate when the called party answers the phone. 3. Tap Call status tones to set the sound settings during a call then tap OK. 4. Tap Alerts on call to turn off alarm and message notifications during a call. Call answering/ending • The power key ends calls: This option will allow you to end a call by pressing the power key without turning off the screen. This option turns on the proximity sensor during calls so that your phone will know to turn the screen off to save power. 䡲 From the Home screen, tap ➔ ➔ Call settings ➔ Auto screen off during calls to create a checkmark and enable the feature. Accessory settings for call ➔ Call settings fid en 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ ➔ Accessory settings for call. 2. The following options are available: • Automatic answering: configures the device to automatically answer and incoming call when a headset is detected. on • Outgoing call conditions: allows you to make calls even when the device is locked. My call sound This option allows you to personalize the sounds you hear during a call with and without earphones. ➔ Call settings 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ ➔ My call sound. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie 2. The following options are available: • Answering key: Tap this option to be able to accept incoming calls by pressing the Home key. Auto screen off during calls • Automatic answering timer: configures the time delay before the device automatically accepts the incoming call. ➔ Call settings ry ➔ ta 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Call answering/ending. 2. Tap My call sound settings. 3. Tap Personalize call sound and follow the detailed on-screen instructions. Use extra vol. for calls This option allows you to see an extra volume button on the screen during calls. 䡲 From the Home screen, tap ➔ ➔ Call settings ➔ Use extra vol. for calls to create a checkmark and enable the feature. Call Functions 61 From the Home screen, tap ➔ ➔ Call settings ➔ Increase volume in pocket to create a checkmark and enable the feature. Call forwarding 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ ➔ Call forwarding ➔ Voice call. ➔ Call settings 2. Tap one of the following options: • Always forward: allows you to forward all voice calls. • Forward when busy allows you to forward voice calls to a designated number instead of your voice mail number if you are on another phone call. on fid en • Forward when unanswered: allows you to forward voice calls to a designated number instead of your voicemail number when there is no answer on your phone. You can also select the amount of time that the phone delays before forwarding. 62 Additional settings 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Additional settings. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie 䡲 ry This option increases the ringtone volume when the device is in a pocket or a bag. It uses the proximity sensor to detect its location. • Forward when unreachable: allows you to forward voice calls to a designated number instead of your voicemail number when you are not in an area covered by your service provider or when your phone is switched off. ta Increase volume in pocket ➔ ➔ Call settings 2. Tap one of the following options: • Caller ID: allows you to choose how your Caller ID will be displayed. Select Network default, Hide number, or Show number. • Call waiting: the network service informs you when someone is trying to reach you during another call. Tap to activate. • Auto redial: automatically redials the last number if the call was either cut off or was unable to connect. Tap to activate. • Noise reduction: allows you to suppress background noise from your side during calls. • Fixed Dialing Numbers: allows you to restrict outgoing calls to a limited set of phone numbers. Changing the PIN2 Code 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ ➔ Call settings ➔ Additional settings ➔ Fixed dialing numbers. ry • Auto area code: allows you to automatically prepend a specific area code to all outbound calls. Slide the slider to the on position. 2. Tap Change PIN2. Enabling FDN 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ ➔ Call settings ➔ Additional settings ➔ Fixed dialing numbers. 3. At the prompt, enter your old PIN2 code. ta Using Fixed Dialing Numbers tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie 4. At the prompt, enter a new PIN2 code. 2. Tap Enable FDN. 5. Confirm your PIN2 code. Managing the FDN List 3. At the prompt, enter your PIN2 code and tap OK. FDN is enabled. 4. To enable FDN after it has been disabled, tap Disable FDN, enter your PIN2 code and tap OK. on fid en Important! Not all SIM cards use a PIN2 code. If your SIM card does not, this menu does not display. The PIN2 code is provided by your carrier. Entering an incorrect PIN2 code could cause the phone to lock. Contact customer service for assistance. When this feature is enabled, you can make calls only to phone numbers stored in the FDN list on the SIM card. Note: Before you can manage an FDN list a list must be created. ➔ Call settings 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ ➔ Additional settings ➔ Fixed dialing numbers. 2. Tap FDN list. 3. A list of all existing FDN numbers will be displayed. Call Functions 63 Vibrate ➔ ➔ Call settings Voicemail service provided by your carrier is the default. Voicemail settings You can view or modify your voicemail number from this menu. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ ➔ Call settings ➔ Voicemail settings. 2. Tap the Voice mail number field, backspace to erase the digits, and enter a new voicemail number using the keypad, then tap OK. Ringtone 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Ringtone. fid en 3. Tap OK. ➔ 2. Tap a ringtone to hear it played. 64 Select a ringtone and tap OK. on 3. 2. Tap Always, Only in silent mode, or Never. TTY Mode tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie 2. Tap My carrier to remove the carrier Voicemail service. This option allows you select vibration settings. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ ➔ Call settings ➔ Vibrate. ry 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Voicemail Service. ta Voicemail service ➔ Call settings A TTY (also known as a TDD or Text Telephone) is a telecommunications device that allows people who are deaf, hard of hearing, or who have speech or language disabilities, to communicate by telephone. Your phone is compatible with select TTY devices. Please check with the manufacturer of your TTY device to ensure that it is compatible with digital cell phones. Your phone and TTY device will connect via a special cable that plugs into your phone’s headset jack. If this cable was not provided with your TTY device, contact your TTY device manufacturer to purchase the connector cable. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ TTY mode. ➔ ➔ Call settings 2. Tap TTY Full, TTY HCO, or TTY VCO. A green checkmark will appear. Tap TTY Off to turn it off. C on fid en tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie 2. Tap Hearing aids to create a checkmark and make your device compatible with a Hearing aid. ta This option allows you to turn on Hearing aid compatibility on your device. ➔ Call 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ settings. ry Hearing aids Call Functions 65 Section 4: Entering Text Your phone comes equipped with an orientation detector that can tell if the phone is being held in an upright (Portrait) or sideways (Landscape) orientation. This is useful when entering text. Text Input Methods There are three text input methods available: • Samsung keyboard (default): Samsung’s on-screen QWERTY keypad that can be used in both portrait and landscape orientation. fid en • Google Voice typing: allows you to enter text by speaking. • Swype: a new way to enter text on touch screens. Instead of tapping each key, use your finger to trace over each letter of a word. on To change the input method, see “Keyboards and Input Methods” on page 140. 66 ta ry Entering Text Using the Samsung Keyboard From a screen where you can enter text, rotate your phone counterclockwise to a Landscape orientation. The on-screen QWERTY keypad will display. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie This section describes how to select the desired text input method when entering characters into your phone. This section also describes the predictive text entry system that reduces the amount of key strokes associated with entering text. Shift Key Handwriting Text Input Mode Delete Key Space Bar New Paragraph Changing the Text Input Mode - Keypad ry There are two main keypad layout keys that will change the on-screen keys within the QWERTY keypad. Sym ABC Symbol/Numeric Mode: activates the number, symbol, and emoticon keys. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Sym ta The available Text Input modes are: Sym and Abc. ABC Mode: activates the default alphabet keys. Can also be set to Abc or abc by using the shift ) key. Note: When in Abc mode, the Sym button will appear. When in Sym mode, the Abc/ABC/abc button will appear. Using ABC Mode 3. Tap the desired alphabetic characters. 4. The screen initially opens in ABC mode. After typing the first letter, the shift key ( ) will change to and following letters will be lowercase. 5. Tap to input another upper-case letter or tap twice to switch to ABC mode. The shift key will change to in ABC mode. All following letters will be uppercase until you tap the shift key again. fid en 1. If desired, rotate your phone counterclockwise to a Landscape orientation. on 2. When you tap the Enter message field, the following screen displays: Entering Text 67 Predictive Text tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie 2. Tap Sym at the bottom of the screen. The following screen displays: By using the Predictive Text option, you can have next-letter prediction and regional error correction, which compensates for pressing the wrong keys on the QWERTY keyboard. Predictive text is turned on by default. 1. To turn Predictive Text on or off, tap ➔ Settings ➔ ➔Language and input. ry Use Symbol/Numeric Mode to add numbers, symbols, or emoticons. 1. Rotate your phone counterclockwise to a Landscape orientation. ta Using Symbol/Numeric Mode 2. Tap the icon next to Samsung keyboard. 3. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Predictive text field, to ON . 4. In the text portion of the message screen, begin typing a word. A list of word options is displayed. Tap one of the words to replace the word that has already been typed or scroll the line of words to the left for more word choices. 5. Tap 68 Sym ABC 1/2 button to access additional symbols. to return to Abc mode. on 4. Tap the fid en 3. Tap the desired number, symbol, or emoticon characters. ta tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Note: You can also use Predictive Text mode in the portrait orientation. ry 5. Continue typing your message. Tap to send the message or press for more options. For more information, refer to “Creating and Sending Messages” on page 104. Entering Text Using Handwriting You can enter text simply by using your finger to handwrite letters on your screen. 1. From the keypad, tap 2. Use your finger tip to write out each character. You can print or use cursive. on fid en 3. You can write out your entire message using the Handwriting feature or tap to switch back to Samsung keyboard mode. Samsung Keyboard Settings For information on how you can configure your Samsung keyboard settings, see “Samsung Keyboard settings” on page 140. Using the Google Voice Typing Feature You can use your voice to enter text using the Google Voice typing feature. 1. From the keypad, touch the top of the screen and drag it down to display your notification panel. 2. Tap Choose input method. 3. Tap Google voice typing. Entering Text 69 Entering Text Using Swype tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie ta ry Swype™ is a text input method that allows you to enter a word by sliding your finger or stylus from letter to letter, lifting your finger between words. Swype uses error correcting algorithms and a language model to predict the next word. Swype also includes a tapping predictive text system. 4. At the Speak now prompt, speak clearly and distinctly into the microphone. The following example shows how to enter the word “This”. Put your finger down on the “T”, and without lifting, glide it to the “h”, then to the “i” then over to the “s”. 5. If the red microphone turns gray, then the feature has timed out and you should tap the microphone icon to start again. The text is displayed in the message as you are speaking. 70 on fid en Note: The feature works best when you break your message down into smaller segments. Enabling and Configuring Swype The Android Keyboard is the default text input method, so to use Swype, you must first change the default keyboard setting. • Double-tap on the word you want to change to correct a misspelled word, then tap the delete key to erase one character. Touch and hold the delete key to erase an entire word. ry To enable Swype: 1. While composing a message, touch and hold anywhere on the message screen. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie 3. Tap the Swype option. A green circle should appear next to Swype. ta 2. Tap Input method. Swype Settings For information on how you can configure your Swype settings, see “Swype Keypad Settings” on page 142. Swype Text Entry Tips You can access the SwypeTips application and watch a video or tutorial on using Swype. You can also use the following Swype text entry tips. • Create a squiggle (like an S shape) to create a double letter (such as pp in apple). selection. fid en • Touch and hold a key to view the punctuation menu then make a contractions. on • Move your finger or stylus over the apostrophe to enter Entering Text 71 Section 5: Contacts and Your Address Book When you access the AT&T Address Book, the network backup service, contacts are automatically synchronized between your phone and online address book. The changes you make are automatically saved and if you ever upgrade, damage, or lose your phone, you can easily restore your contacts onto your new phone. To activate the AT&T Address Book: 1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts Your Address Book is displayed. fid en 2. If you have not synchronized your phone with your online AT&T Address Book recently, the AT&T Address Book screen is displayed. Tap Yes if you want to synchronize your Address Book. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. Your AT&T Address Book is Ready to Use. You can now make a call or send a message through your Address Book. 72 on ry Synchronizing your AT&T Address Book If you ever upgrade, damage, or lose your phone, you can easily restore your contacts onto your new phone by following these steps: 1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie AT&T Address Book Activation You can also manage your Address Book on the web at http://www.att.com/addressbook. ta This section allows you to manage your daily contacts by storing their name and number in your Address Book. Address Book entries can be sorted by name, entry, or group. 2. Press ➔ Settings ➔ AT&T Address Book. 3. At the AT&T Address Book screen, tap Yes to synchronize your phone with your online Address Book. 4. If there are existing contacts on your phone, you will be prompted if you would like to remove them first. Tap Yes or No. Note: You must first copy any contacts that exist on your SIM card to your phone. For more information, refer to “Copying Contacts to the Phone” on page 83. Your phone is synchronized. 5. At the Your AT&T Address Book is Ready for Use prompt, tap OK. ry Your Contact list is displayed. 4. Tap the Name field and use the on-screen keypad to enter the full name. For more information, refer to “Entering Text” on page 66. – or – 5. Tap the Phone number field. Saving a Number from the Home screen 1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts ➔ 2. At the Save contact to prompt, tap Phone, SIM, or Account name. 3. Tap the image icon and assign a picture to the new entry by choosing one of three options: • Image: retrieve a previously stored image from your Gallery or from your My files folder and assign it to this entry. Tap an image to assign the image to the contact, then tap Done. fid en • Take picture: use the camera to take a new picture and assign it to this entry, then tap Done. • Remove: although not an option with a new entry, deletes any previously assigned image on an existing contact. on next to the Name field to display additional Tap name fields. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Use the following procedure to add a new contact to your Address Book. ta Adding a New Contact The numerical keypad is displayed. The Mobile button Mobile initially displays next to the Phone number field. If you want to add a phone number that is not a mobile number, tap the Mobile button and select from Mobile, Home, Work, Work fax, Home Fax, Pager, Other, Custom (add your own label), or Callback. 6. Enter the phone number. Tap to add another Phone number field or tap to delete a field. 7. Tap the Email address field. The keypad is displayed. Contacts and Your Address Book 73 Tap to add another Email address field or tap to delete a field. 9. Tap the Address field. The keypad is displayed. The Home button Home initially displays next to the Address field. If you want to add an address that is not a Home address, tap the Home button and select from Home, Work, Other, or Custom (add your own label). 10. Enter the address. fid en to add another address field or tap Tap delete a field. to on 11. Tap any of the following fields that you want to add to your new contact: 74 to add a Birthday, Anniversary, Other, or ry • Groups: assign the contact to Not assigned, ICE - emergency contacts, Co-workers, Family, or Friends. • Ringtone: adds a field used to assign a message tone that will sound when messages are received from this contact. Choose between Default, Ringtones, or Go to My files. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie 8. Enter the Email address. • Events: tap Custom. ta The Home button Home initially displays next to the Email address field. If you want to add an Email address that is not a Home email address, tap the Home button and select from Home, Work, Other, or Custom (add your own label). • Message alert: allows you to set a message alert tone for the contact. • Vibration pattern: allows you to set the specific type of vibration. • Add another field: tap this button to add another field such as Phonetic name, Organization, IM, Notes, Nickname, Website, Internet call, or Relationship. 12. Tap Save to save the new contact. Adding Pauses to Contact Numbers When you call automated systems, you are often required to enter a password or account number. Instead of manually entering the numbers each time, you can store the numbers in your Contacts along with special characters called pauses 2. Tap to edit. 4. Tap the screen at the position where the pause or wait needs to be added. Sym ry 2. Press and hold the Contact that you want to edit. 3. Tap Edit. 3. Tap the phone number field. 5. Tap When editing an existing contact, you can tap a field and change or delete the information, or you can add additional fields to the contact’s list of information. 1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie To add a pause or a wait to an existing Contact: , and then tap 1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts the name or number to open the Contact. Editing an Existing Contact ta and waits. A pause will stop the calling sequence for two seconds and a wait will pause the calling sequence until you enter a number or press a key. 6. Tap Pause to add a two-second pause or tap Wait to add a wait, and use the keypad to enter the additional numbers. A pause will be displayed as a comma (,) and a wait will be displayed as a semi-colon (;). on fid en 7. Tap Save to save your changes, or tap Cancel to discard. 4. Tap any of the fields to add, change, or delete information. 5. Tap Save to save the edited information. Using Contacts Dialing or Messaging from Address Book Once you have stored phone numbers in the Address Book, you can dial them easily and quickly by either using their SIM card location number or by using the Search field to locate the entry. From the Address book, you can also send messages. Contacts and Your Address Book 75 3. Tap the contact you wish to call or message. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Depending on your particular SIM card, the maximum number of phone numbers the SIM card can store and how they are stored may differ. 1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts 4. Tap the phone icon to make a phone call or tap the message icon to send a message. ry You can store phone numbers and their corresponding names onto your SIM card and phone’s onboard memory. The two locations are physically separate but are used as a single entity, called the Address Book. ta Finding an Address Book Entry 2. Within the Contacts list (sorted alphabetically), tap a letter on the right side of the display to quickly jump to the contacts beginning with that letter. 76 on fid en For more information, refer to “Creating and Sending Messages” on page 104. Tip: From the Contact list, sweep right over a listing to make a call. Sweep left over a listing to send a message. 2. Tap a contact name (the name you want to join to another entry). Note: typically this is the same contact with a different name or account information. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Many people now maintain multiple email accounts, social networking logins, and other similar account information. For example, a Facebook account login name might differ from a corporate email account login because they are maintained separately and for different groups of people. ry Joining Contact Information For more information about synchronizing accounts, see “Synchronizing Accounts” on page 78. 1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts ta Joining Contacts This device can synchronize with multiple accounts such as Facebook, Twitter, MySpace, Corporate email, and Google. When you synchronize your phone with these accounts, each account creates a separate contact entry in the Contacts list. If one of your contacts (Amy Smith, for example) has a regular email account that you maintain in Gmail, but also has a Facebook account under her maiden and married name, as well as a Yahoo! chat account, when you merge these accounts into your Contacts list you can join all of her entries and view the information in one record. on fid en The next time you synchronize your phone with your accounts, any updates that contacts make to email account names, email addresses, etc. automatically update in your contacts list. 3. Press ➔ Join contact. The contact list is displayed. Note: Only contacts stored on your phone can be joined. 4. Tap the second contact entry (the entry in which to join). The second contact is now joined with the first and the account information is merged into one screen. Note: The information is still maintained in both entries, but displays in one record for easier viewing when you join the contacts. 5. Tap the Connection bar to view the contact information you joined. The contacts and information displays with an icon next to the contact name to indicate what type of account information is contained in the entry. Contacts and Your Address Book 77 . 3. Tap the Connection bar. next to entry in which you 4. Tap the minus sign want to unjoin. The contact is now separated and no longer displays in the merged record screen. Marking a Contact as Default When you use messaging type applications, the application needs to know which information is primary (default) in a contact entry list. For example, you may have three different contact records for John Smith, so the application will be looking for the “default” number or entry. 1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts 78 Synchronizing Accounts From the Accounts menu you decide if you want applications to synchronize, send, and receive data at any given time, or if you want the applications to synchronize automatically. After determining how you want the accounts to synchronize, indicate which account to synchronize with your Contacts list. 1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts fid en 2. Press on 2. Tap a Contact name. 4. To change the default contact, tap the radio button next to another entry that you want to be the default. The radio button will turn green, then tap Done. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie 2. Tap a contact name (the account name from which you want to unlink an entry). Note: typically this is the same contact with a different name or account information. 3. Press ➔ Mark as default. The Mark as default screen displays radio buttons next to the contact names or phone numbers of all the linked contacts. The radio button next to the default contact will be green. ry 1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts ta Unjoining a Contact then tap Accounts. 3. Tap the Auto sync app data checkbox to create a checkmark and activate the feature. 4. Tap OK to synchronize all accounts. • Merge with Google: allows you to merge your contacts together with your Google account contacts. Options in Address Book 1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie You can access Address Book options while at the main Address Book page or while in the details page for a specific entry. then press 2. The following options are displayed: • Delete: allows you to delete 1 or more of your contacts. • SIM Management: allows you to copy contacts from your phone to your SIM card or from your SIM card to your phone. You can also delete contacts from your SIM. fid en • Import/Export: allows you to move contacts to or from your memory card or USB storage. You can also send a namecard via Bluetooth, ChatON, Email, Gmail, Messaging, or Wi-Fi Direct. • Merge with Samsung account: allows you to merge your contacts together with your Samsung account contacts. on • Accounts: allows you to add and manage your Samsung, ChatON, Google, LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol), and Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync accounts. Tap Add account and then follow the on-screen instructions. ry Address Book Options ta The accounts are synchronized. • Speed dial setting: allows you to set up speed-dialing. For more information, refer to “Making a Call Using Speed Dial” on page 50. • Send email: allows you to send an email using your Google account. • Send message: allows you to send a text or picture message. • Contacts to display: You can choose to display all of your contacts or only display contacts on your Phone, SIM, or contacts stored to other accounts. You can also tap Customized list to change other options on how your contacts are displayed. • Settings: allows you to choose set the following options: – Only contacts with phones: allows you to only display contacts that have phone numbers. – List by: allows you to sort by First name or Last name. Contacts and Your Address Book 79 – Service numbers: allows you to display or edit your service numbers. – Contact sharing settings: allows you to send all or individual – AT&T Address Book: allows you to access the AT&T Address Book so you can sync your contacts. Options at Selected Contact Screen 1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts 2. Tap a contact and at the contact’s display screen, press 3. The following options are displayed: • History: allows you to view the phone and message history for the contact. fid en • Edit: allows you to edit the contact’s information. • Delete: allows you to delete the contact from your Address Book. on • Join contact: allows you to join contacts with other contacts (only displays when contact is saved to SIM). 80 • Mark as default: when you have multiple contacts linked together, you can mark one of them as default (only displays when contact is saved to the phone). For more information, refer to “Marking a Contact as Default” on page 78. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie contacts via Bluetooth in the form of namecards. • Separate contact: allows you to separate contacts that have been joined. ry name first. ta – Display contacts by: allows you to sort by First name or Last • Assign speed dial: allows you to assign this contact to your speed dial list. For more information, refer to “Making a Call Using Speed Dial” on page 50. • Share namecard via: allows you to send the contact’s information via Bluetooth, ChatON, Email, Gmail, Messaging, or Wi-Fi Direct. • Add to/Remove from reject list: allows you to add or remove the contact from your reject list. If they call while being on the reject list, the call will be sent directly to voice mail. • Print contact info: allows you to print the contact’s namecard to a Samsung printer using Wi-Fi. • Add shortcut to Home: allows you to place a shortcut for this contact on your Home screen. Creating a New Group Groups 1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts ➔ ➔ Create. Adding a Contact to a Group 3. Tap Add to group. 4. Tap a group entry. 5. Tap Done. The contact is added to the group. Removing a Contact From a Group 1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts Groups Groups 2. Tap a group entry. 3. Press ➔ Remove member. ry 3. Tap Group ringtone to choose an audio file for assignment to this new group. Choose from Default, Ringtones, or Go to My files. 4. Tap Vibration pattern to choose an audio file for assignment to this new group. ➔ 5. Tap Add member to add contacts to the new group. 6. Tap each contact you want to add to create a checkmark. You can also tap Select all. 7. Tap Done. fid en 4. Tap all of the contacts you want to remove from this group. A green checkmark will appear next to their name. 5. Tap Done. 2. Tap the Group name field and use the on-screen keypad to enter a new group name. For more information, refer to “Entering Text” on page 66. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie 2. Press and hold a contact that you would like to add to a group. ta 1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts ➔ Groups Groups on The contacts are now removed from the group. 8. Tap Save to save the new Group category. Editing a Caller Group To edit a Group entry, there must be at least one member as part of the selected group. ➔ Groups 1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts Groups Contacts and Your Address Book 81 2. Tap a group entry. 3. Press Removing Favorites from your Address Book 1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts ➔ Edit. 6. Tap Done. 3. Tap Remove from favorites on the displayed list. 7. Tap Save to save the edited Group category. Address Book Favorites Once you have stored phone numbers in the Address Book, you can add them to your Favorites list. To view your Favorites list: 䡲 From the Home screen, tap Contacts Favorites ➔ Favorites Adding Favorites to your Address Book 1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts fid en 2. Within the Contacts list, touch and hold a contact that you want to add to your favorites list. 3. Tap Add to Favorites on the displayed list. on 4. A gold star will appear next to the contact in the Address Book. 82 ta ry 5. Tap Add member to add more contacts to this group. 2. Within the Contacts list, touch and hold a contact that you want to remove from your favorites list. Contacts in your Favorites list will have a gold star. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie 4. Make modifications to the Group name, Group ringtone, or Vibration pattern fields. 4. The gold star will no longer appear next to the contact in the Address Book. Managing Address Book Contacts You can copy, delete, and view the memory status for the Phone and SIM contacts on your phone. Copying Contacts to the SIM Card Note: When storing an Address Book entry into the SIM card, only the name, phone number, and email address are available as fields. Also, if you move the SIM card to another phone that does not support additional fields on the SIM card, this additional information may not be available. 1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts SIM Management. ➔ ➔ 4. Tap Done to copy. 5. At the Copy to SIM display, tap OK. 1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts SIM Management. 2. Tap Copy Contacts from SIM. Deleting Contacts from the SIM card ➔ ➔ ➔ 2. Tap Delete Contacts from SIM. ➔ fid en 3. At the Create contact under account prompt, tap on Phone or an account name that you would like to copy the contact to. The phone then displays a list of your current contacts stored on your SIM card. on The selected numbers are copied. 1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts SIM Management. The selected numbers are copied to the SIM card. Copying Contacts to the Phone 5. Tap Done to copy. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie 3. Tap the contacts to place a checkmark adjacent to those entries you wish to have copied to the SIM card. • Repeat this step for all individual entries you wish copied to the SIM or tap Select all to place a checkmark alongside all entries. 4. Tap the contacts to place a checkmark adjacent to those entries you wish to have copied to your phone. • Repeat this step for all individual entries you wish copied to your phone or tap Select all to place a checkmark alongside all entries. ry The phone then displays a list of your current phone contacts. ta 2. Tap Copy Contacts to SIM. The phone then displays a list of your current SIM contacts. 3. Tap the contacts to place a checkmark adjacent to those entries you wish to have deleted from the SIM card. • Repeat this step for all individual entries you wish copied to the SIM or tap Select all to place a checkmark alongside all entries. 4. Tap Delete. 5. At the Delete Contacts from SIM prompt, tap OK. Contacts and Your Address Book 83 You can delete Phone or SIM entries from your phone’s memory. 1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts 3. Tap Delete on the displayed list. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie 2. Within the Contacts list, touch and hold a contact that you want to delete. 4. At the Delete prompt, tap OK to delete the contact or Cancel to exit. Using the Service Dialing Numbers fid en You can view the list of Service Dialing Numbers (SDN) assigned by your service provider. These numbers may include emergency numbers, customer service numbers, and directory inquiries. ➔ ➔ 1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts Settings. 2. Tap Service numbers. 3. Scroll through the available numbers (if available). 84 on 4. Tap a number and the call is made. Note: This menu is available only when your SIM card supports Service Dialing Numbers. ry Deleting Address Book Entries from the Phone ta The selected numbers are deleted from the SIM card. Section 6: Multimedia AT&T Locker AT&T Locker allows you to store, share, and sync all of your photos, videos, and documents in one safe, convenient place; the AT&T cloud. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ AT&T Locker 2. Sign on to your Google account if you are not already signed on. For more information, refer to “Creating a New Google Account” on page 13. The Play Store is displayed. on 5. Tap Accept & download. fid en 3. The first time you sign in, the Play Store Terms of Service will be displayed. Tap Accept to continue or Decline to exit. 4. Tap Update. ta ry 6. At the AT&T Locker homescreen, tap Sign Me Up! to create an account or tap Sign In if you already have an account. 7. Follow the on-screen instructions to use AT&T Locker. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie This section explains how to use the multimedia features of your phone, including AT&T Locker, Media Hub, Music Hub, Music Player, Google Play Music, Video Player, Play Movies & TV, Gallery, Camera, and Camcorder. AT&T Locker will be downloaded to your device. Media Hub Samsung Media Hub is your one stop for the hottest movie and TV content. With hundreds of titles available at your fingertips, entertaining yourself or your kids on the go has never been easier. You can rent or purchase your favorite content and watch from the convenience of anywhere. Featuring the stunning viewing quality Samsung is known for, Samsung Media Hub is your gateway to mobile video like you've never experienced it before. Note: Media Hub usage is based on service availability. Using Media Hub 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ Security ➔ Unknown sources to create a checkmark and allow the Samsung app to run. Multimedia 85 ➔ ➔Media Hub 4. Read the Terms and Conditions screen and tap the I agree to the Terms and Conditions checkbox. 10. The media will be stored in the My Media folder. Media Hub Notices • Any media item (Media Content) may be rented or purchased after ta 5. Tap Accept to continue or Decline to exit. 9. At the Details screen, follow the on-screen instructions to create a Samsung account and make a purchase. ry 2. At the warning prompt, tap OK. 3. Tap Home you create an account in Media Hub. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie The Media Hub screen displays. 6. At the Media Hub screen, What’s New is displayed with recently added media that you can rent or purchase. 7. The following tabs are displayed at the top of the screen: • Home: displays the Media Hub main screen. • Movies: displays movies that are available for rent or purchase. Scroll through the top navigation bar and select a movie category. The movies of that type will be displayed below. fid en • TV Shows: displays TV shows that are available for purchase. Scroll through the top navigation bar and select a TV category. The TV shows of that type will be displayed below. • Media Content that is downloaded may be viewed concurrently on up to five (5) devices with Media Hub that are also registered to the same account. • You may choose to remove a device from your account no more than once every 90 days. • You may remove Media Content from a device as many times as you’d like. You will have the ability to re-download the Media Content at a later point in time subject to content re-download availability and studio permissions. • You MUST be in network coverage to license Media Content you have acquired through the Service. • You can use 3G, 4G, or Wi-Fi connectivity in order to download 8. Scroll through the media listings and tap on an item you would like to purchase or rent. • Unlike purchased Media Content, rented Media Content will be 86 on • My Media: allows you to view all of the media that you have purchased or rented. Tap a media entry to view it. Media Content. viewable on only 1 device in your account. • You may begin watching downloaded Media Content as soon as a) Note: You must sign up for an account before accessing some of the Music Hub options. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie license acquisition has occurred and b) sufficient amount of the Media Content has been buffered. The Music Hub app lets you upload your music collection to the cloud, stream and purchase songs from an extensive catalog, and listen to personal radio. ry where there is a weak signal. Music Hub ta • Media Content is downloaded and saved onto the SD card. • Your Media Content may pause/stop or not download in networks • You must finish watching rented Media Content within 24 consecutive hours of start of playback. • Stopping, pausing or restarting rented Media Content does not extend the available viewing time. fid en • In no event will rented Media Content be available for a period of more than thirty (30) days (or shorter on a title-by-title basis) after the Media Content has been rented (e.g., if you begin viewing rented Media Content on the 29th day after the rental transaction, but do not finish viewing the entire title, that rented Media Content may not be available for the entire twenty-four (24) consecutive hour period if such period would extend the viewable time beyond the thirty (30) day rental window). • You cannot play any media content downloaded from Media Hub on through any output on your mobile phone, including All Share. 1. Sign on to your Samsung account if you have not already done so. For more information, refer to “Creating a Samsung Account” on page 12. 2. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Music Hub 3. Read the introduction material and tap Continue to continue. Tap Music Hub Video to watch a helpful video about Music Hub. The Music Hub Home screen displays. 4. Tap one of the following options: • Featured: This is the Music Hub home screen. Displays top albums, featured albums, top tracks, new releases, and more. Tap an item to display more information and prices. • Genres: Displays bestsellers and new releases by genre, such as pop, rock, jazz, comedy, and blues. Multimedia 87 – Basket: Displays songs that you have selected to buy. Tap Buy 2. Select an album or a track. 3. Tap (Cart) next to an album to add the album to your basket or next to each track that you want to add to your basket. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie to start the purchase process. Tap Menu ➔ Delete all to clear your basket or tap Remove to delete songs from your basket. You can use Music Hub to buy albums or individual tracks. You can also build your own album from various tracks. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Music Hub ry • My page: Displays the following options: Making a Purchase ta • Playlists: Displays downloaded playlists and your library of songs and albums. Tap New to create a new playlist. – Purchase List: Displays a list of your purchases. – Payment information: Allows you to set up your payment method. Tap Add card to enter your payment information. – Help: Display help information for Music Hub. Note: You have to be signed in to use some options. To sign in, tap Sign in and use the keyboard to enter your Email address and Music Hub Password. Tap Create account to set up a new account. 4. Tap (Add) next to the album to add it to your album. – or – 5. Tap (Add) next to each track that you want to add to your album. 6. Tap New to create a new album. Music Player 88 on fid en 5. Tap (Search) and use the keyboard to enter a key word or phrase to search for tracks, albums, or artists. Tap on the keyboard to search Music Hub. Select an item to play a sample, add an item to your basket, or add an item to your album. The Music Player is an application that can play music files. The Music Player supports files with extensions AAC, AAC+, eAAC+, MP3, WMA, 3GP, MP4, and M4A. Launching the Music Player allows you to navigate through your music library, play songs, and create playlists (music files bigger than 300 KB are displayed). Playing Music 1. Tap ➔ Music Player Shuffle On: the current list of songs are randomly shuffled for playback. Shuffle Off: songs play in order and are not shuffled. 3. Scroll through the list of songs and tap an entry to begin playback. Lists the current playlist songs. ta ry 2. Tap a library category at the top of the screen (All, Playlists, Albums, Artists, Music square, or Folders) to view the available music files. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Provides access to the Music square. 4. The following Music Player controls are available: Displays the current song in the player window. Provides access to the SoundAlive feature. Pause the song. Start the song after being paused. Press and hold to rewind the song. Tap to go to previous song. Press and hold to fast-forward the song. Tap to go to next song. Volume control. fid en Repeat one: repeats the currently playing song. Repeat all: replays the current list when the list ends. on Play All: plays the current song list once. Music Player Options To access additional options, follow these steps: 1. While in the Music Player, press 2. The follow options are available: • Add to quick list: adds the current music file to the Quick list. • Via Bluetooth: scans for devices and pairs with a Bluetooth headset. • Share music via: allows you to share your music by using Bluetooth, Email, Gmail, Group Cast, Messaging, or Wi-Fi Direct. Multimedia 89 • Play speed: set the play speed anywhere between 0.5X and 2.0X using the slider. • Details: allows you to view media info such as Artist, Title, Biography, and other information. • Music menu: this menu allows you to select which categories you want to display. Choices are: Albums, Artists, Genres, Music square, Folders, Composers, Years, Most played, Recently played, or Recently added. Tap each item that you want to display in the Music menu. • Settings: allows you to change your Music Player settings. For more information, refer to “Music Player Settings” on page 90. • End: allows you to end the Music Player app. Music Player Settings ➔ Settings. fid en The Music Player Settings menu allows you to set preferences for the Music Player such as whether you want the music to play in the background, sound effects, and how the music menu displays. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Music Player 2. Press on 3. Select one of the following settings: • SoundAlive: set a type of equalization such as Normal, Pop, Rock, Jazz, Dance, Classic, etc. 90 ta tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie • Set as: allows you to set a music file to Phone ringtone, Caller ringtone, or Alarm tone. ry • Add to playlist: allows you to add the current music file to a selected playlist. • Lyrics: when activated, the lyrics of the song are displayed if available. • Music auto off: when activated, music will automatically turn off after a set interval. Using Playlists Playlists are used to assign songs to a list of preferred media which can then be grouped into a list for later playback. These Playlists can be created via either the handset’s Music Player options menu or from within a 3rd party music application (such as Windows Media Player) and then downloaded to the handset. Creating a Playlist 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Tap the Playlists tab. ➔ Music Player Editing a Playlist ➔ Create playlist. Besides adding and removing music files in a playlist, you can also rename the playlist. ➔ Music Player To edit a playlist: 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Tap Playlists. 2. Tap the Playlists tab. 3. Tap the playlist name in which to add music. 3. Press 4. Tap 4. Tap a playlist name to edit. Add music. To remove music files from a playlist: 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Music Player 2. Tap the Playlists tab. For information on downloading music for your phone, see “Google Play Music” on page 91. Google Play Music ➔ Remove. fid en 3. Tap the playlist name in which to delete music. 4. Press 5. Tap the checkbox to the left of each track you want to remove from this playlist, or tap Select all to remove all the music tracks from this playlist, then tap Remove. on ➔ Edit title. 5. Enter a new name for the playlist then tap OK. 5. Tap a music file, or tap Select all to add all the music tracks to this playlist then tap Done. Removing Music from a Playlist ➔ Music Player tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie To add files to the playlist: 1. From the Home screen, tap ry Adding Music to a Playlist ta 3. Press 4. Type a name for this playlist in the field and tap OK. With Google Play Music, you can play music that you have added to your music file as well as any music you copied from your PC. While offline, you can listen to music you have copied from your PC. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Play Music 2. At the Welcome screen, tap Next. 3. At the Select an account screen, tap an account that you would like to link to Google Play Music or tap Add Account. Multimedia 91 6. Tap a song to start playback. 7. From the main Play Music screen, you can tap any of the following tabs for a more detailed listing of songs: Recent, Artists, Albums, Songs, Playlists, and Genres. 8. Tap for the following options: • Shuffle all: allows you to play all of your music in a shuffled order. • Make available offline: allows you play your music without being online or connected to the network. fid en • Offline music only: only allows you to play music offline. • Settings: allows you to view Open source licenses and the music version for the Play Music application. on • Help: allows you to view a help file on the Google Support website. 92 ry The Video Player application plays video files stored on your microSD card. 1. Tap ➔ Video Player 2. All videos that you have on your phone and memory card will be displayed. Tap the video that you want to play. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie All music on your device and external SD card is displayed including Music folders that may contain multiple songs. Video Player ta 4. At the Get free music screen, tap Get free songs or Skip. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions for getting your free music. 3. The video will begin to play. 4. The following video controls are available: Pause the video. Start the video after being paused. Press and hold to rewind the video. Tap to go to previous video. Press and hold to fast-forward the video. Tap to go to next video. Volume control. ry With Google Play Movies & TV, you can rent thousands of different movies and television shows. You can watch instantly, or download your movie or show for offline viewing at a later time. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔Play Movies & TV tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Original size view. The video will be played in its original size. Play Movies & TV ta PIP (Picture In Picture) view. The video will be played in a small window so you can use your phone for other purposes while watching the video. Double-tap screen to return to previous size. Full-screen in ratio view. The video is enlarged as much as possible without becoming distorted. Full-screen view. The entire screen is used, which may cause some minor distortion. 2. Log on to your Google account if you have not already done so. 3. Following the on-screen instructions for renting and viewing movies and TV shows. 4. Tap the Movies tab to view movies you can rent. 5. Tap the TV Shows tab to view shows you can rent. fid en Note: The screen view icons are a three-way toggle. The icon that is displayed, is the mode that will appear after the icon is tapped. on For more information on downloading videos for your phone, see “Media Hub” on page 85. 6. Tap the PERSONAL VIDEOS tab to view movies you have on your phone or memory card. 7. Press for additional options. Gallery The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos. For photos, you can also perform basic editing tasks, view a slideshow, set photos as wallpaper or contact image, and share as a picture message. Multimedia 93 . Note: If your device displays that the memory is full when you access Gallery, delete some of the files by using My files or other file management applications and try again. For more information, refer to “My Files” on page 189. Viewing Pictures : allows you to delete the picture. for additional options. Viewing Videos Note: If no control icons are displayed on the screen in addition to the picture, tap anywhere on the screen to display them. 1. Tap a video to select it. 1. Tap a thumbnail to view the picture. fid en Note: If no control icons are displayed on the screen in addition to the picture, tap anywhere on the screen to display them. on 2. The following options are available at the top of the screen: • Slideshow : allows you to see your photos in a slideshow. You can also select Slideshow settings to set Effects, Music, and Speed. 94 • Delete 3. Press tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie 2. Tap an Album and thumbnails of the contents will be displayed. • Share via : allows you to share the picture via Group Cast, ChatON, Flipboard, Picasa, Google+, S Memo, Bluetooth, Wi-Fi Direct, Messaging, Gmail, or Email. ry ➔ Gallery All of the Albums that hold your pictures and videos will be displayed with folder name and number of files. ta 1. Tap 2. Tap 3. Press to play the video. for additional options. For video player controls, see “Video Player” on page 92. ➔ Camera ry 2. Using the phone’s main display screen as a viewfinder, adjust the image by aiming the camera at the subject. 3. Before you take a picture, use the Up and Down Volume keys to zoom in or out. You can magnify the picture up to x4 (400 percent). – or – tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie This section explains how to use the camera on your phone. You can take photographs and shoot video by using the builtin camera functionality. Your 8 megapixel camera produces photos in JPEG format. 1. From the main Home screen, tap to activate the camera mode. ta Camera Important! Do not take photos of people without their permission. Do not take photos in places where cameras are not allowed. Do not take photos in places where you may interfere with another person’s privacy. Using the Camera Taking Photos fid en Taking pictures with your device’s built-in camera is as simple as choosing a subject, pointing the camera, then pressing the camera key. on Note: When taking a photo in direct sunlight or in bright conditions, shadows may appear on the photo. Pinch the screen to zoom out or pinch outwards to zoom in. 4. If desired, before taking the photo, you can tap on-screen icons to access various camera options and settings. 5. You can also tap the screen to move the focus to the area you touch. 6. Press the Camera key ( ) until the shutter sounds. (The picture is automatically stored within your designated storage location. If no microSD is installed, all pictures are stored on the Phone.) For more information, refer to “Camera Options” on page 96. Multimedia 95 Front Facing Camera Charger on Storage Location ry tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Camera Key Effects Self-portrait: allows you to activate the front facing camera so you can take pictures of yourself or video chat. Image Viewer Settings Display Image 7. While viewing a picture, after you have taken it, pinch the screen outwards to zoom in or pinch the screen inwards to zoom out. You can magnify the picture up to x4. to return to the viewfinder. fid en Camera Options on Options are represented by icons across both sides of the screen. 96 ta Flash Shooting Mode 8. Press Camera / Camcorder Mode: allows you to take a photo in various modes. Once you change the mode, the corresponding indicator appears at the top left of the display. Slide the button up for Camera, or down for Camcorder. Mode Flash: allows you to set the flash options to Off, On, or Auto flash. Shooting mode: allows you to set the shooting mode to one of the following: • Single shot: takes a single photo and view it before returning to the shooting mode. • Best photo: takes 8 photographs in quick succession and allows you to select and save the best. • Face detection: double tap on a face to zoom in or • Low light: allows you to take better pictures when the light is low. • Panorama: takes a landscape photo by taking an initial photo and then adding additional images to itself. The guide box lets you view the area where the second part of the panoramic picture should fall within. • Share shot: uses Wi-Fi Direct to share your pictures quickly with your friends. • HDR: takes pictures in HDR (High Dynamic Range) mode to increase image detail. • Buddy photo share: uses face recognition from fid en pictures in your contacts to send your friends or family pictures of themselves. on • Beauty: adjusts the contrast to smooth facial features. subject. Once the camera detects the person’s smile, it takes the picture. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie out. • Smile shot: the camera focuses on the face of your ry succession and selects the best photograph based on open eyes, smiles, sudden movement, etc. ta • Best Face: takes 5 photographs in quick Effects: allows you to change the color tone or apply special effects to the photo. Options include: No effect, Cold vintage, Warm vintage, Posterize, Solarize, Green point, Blue point, Red-yellow point, Washed out, Cartoonify, Black and white, Sepia, and Negative. Settings: Edit shortcuts: allows you to set shortcut icons for the settings that you use the most. Best photo: takes 8 photographs in quick succession and allows you to select and save the best. Self-portrait: allows you to set the front camera so you can take pictures of yourself. Flash: allows you to set the flash options to Off, On, or Auto flash. Multimedia 97 ry White balance: allows you to set this option to one of the following choices: Auto, Daylight, Cloudy, Incandescent, or Fluorescent. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Effects: allows you to change the color tone or apply special effects to the photo. Options include: No effect, Cold vintage, Warm vintage, Posterize, Solarize, Green point, Blue point, Red-yellow point, Washed out, Cartoonify, Black and white, Sepia, and Negative. Resolution: allows you to set the image size to either: 8M (3264x2448), W6M (3264x1836), 3.2M (2048x1536), W2.4M (2048x1152), W0.9M (1280x720), or 0.3M (640x480). ta Shooting mode: allows you to set the shooting mode. Scene mode: allows you to set the Scene to help take the best pictures possible. Options include None, Portrait, Landscape, Night, Sports, Party/Indoor, Beach/Snow, Sunset, Dawn, Fall Color, Firework, Text, Candlelight, and Backlight. Helpful tips are shown for each scene mode at the bottom of the display screen. Exposure value: allows you to adjust the brightness level by moving the slider. fid en Focus mode: allows you to set this option to Auto focus or Macro. Use Macro mode to take close-up pictures. 98 on Timer: allows you to set a timer for how long to wait before taking a picture. Options include: Off, 2 sec, 5 sec, and 10 sec. ISO: ISO determines how sensitive the light meter is on your digital camera. Choose from Auto, 100, 200, 400, or 800. Use a lower ISO number to make your camera less sensitive to light, a higher ISO number to take photos with less light, or Auto to let the camera automatically adjust the ISO for each of your shots. Metering: allows you to set how the camera measures or meters the light source: Centre-weighted, Spot, or Matrix. Outdoor visibility: allows you to maximize your photos taken while outdoors. Save as flipped: when set to On, this option allows you to take and save a mirror-image photo. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Auto share shot: allows you to easily connect to the devices you want to share pictures with and then bring the devices back together (back to back) to connect them. ry Guidelines: allows you to turn the guidelines On or Off. Take photos using voice: allows you to take photos using your voice. You can use words such as Capture, Shoot, Smile, and Cheese. ta Auto contrast: provides a clear image even under backlight circumstances where intensity of illumination can vary excessively. Image quality: allows you to set the image quality to: Superfine, Fine, or Normal. Reset: allows you to reset all camera or camcorder settings to the default values. GPS tag: allows you to turn GPS On or Off (also known as Geotagging). The location of where the picture is taken is attached to the picture. (Only available in Camera mode.) Before you can use the GPS tag (Geotagging), from the Home screen tap ➔ Settings ➔ Location services and tap Use GPS satellites to create a checkmark. Storage: allows you to configure the default storage location for images or videos as either Phone or Memory card (if inserted). fid en Anti-Shake: reduces image blur due to the movement of the subject of the photo or hand movement. Shutter sound: allows you to set the Shutter sound to On or Off. Image viewer: allows you to access the Image viewer and the various viewing options for a selected picture. Image viewer options are described in the following section. The last picture you took, will be displayed as a thumbnail in the Image viewer icon. on Contextual filename: allows you to have your location added as part of the filename. You must first activate GPS tag described above. Multimedia 99 Using the Camcorder Note: The camera may not be able to properly record videos to a memory card with a slow transfer speed. Shooting Video fid en Tip: When shooting video in direct sunlight or in bright conditions, it is recommended that you provide your subject with sufficient light by having the light source behind you. 1. From the main Home screen, tap Camera activate the camera mode. to on 2. Touch and drag the Camera mode button down to Camcorder Mode. 100 4. Before you take a video, use the Up and Down Volume keys to zoom in or out. You can magnify the video up to x4 (400 percent). – or – tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie In addition to taking photos, the camera also doubles as a camcorder that also allows you to record, view, and send videos. ry After you take a photo, you can access various options from the Image Viewer. The Image Viewer uses your Gallery. For more information, refer to “Gallery” on page 93. 3. Using the phone’s main display screen as a viewfinder, adjust the image by aiming the camcorder at the subject. ta Viewing your Pictures Pinch the screen to zoom out or pinch outwards to zoom in. 5. Tap the Video key ( ) to begin shooting video. The red light will blink while recording. 6. You can tap the screen to move the focus to the area you touch. 7. Tap to turn on auto focus. This will automatically focus on the middle of the screen. 8. To capture an image from the video while recording, tap . This feature is not available when the antishake feature is activated. 9. Tap the Video key ( ) again to stop the recording and save the video file to your Camera folder. 10. Once the file has been saved, tap the image viewer, then tap to play your video for review. ry to return to the viewer. Camcorder Options Effects: allows you to change the color tone or apply special effects to the video. Options include: No effect, Cold vintage, Warm vintage, Posterize, Solarize, Green point, Blue point, Red-yellow point, Washed out, Cartoonify, Black and white, Sepia, and Negative. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Options are represented by icons across both sides of the screen. ta 11. Press Recording mode: allows you to set the recording mode to: Normal, which is limited only by available space on the destination location and to Limit for MMS, which is limited by MMS size restrictions. Camera / Camcorder Mode: allows you to take a photo in various modes. Once you change the mode, the corresponding indicator appears at the top left of the display. Slide the button up for Camera, or down for Camcorder. Live Shooting: takes a photo during a video recording session in Camcorder mode. You can view the photo in your image viewer or Gallery. Settings: Edit shortcuts: allows you to set shortcut icons for the settings that you use the most. Self-recording: allows you to set the front camera so you can take videos of yourself or video chat. Flash: allows you to set the flash options to Off or On. When you set the flash to On, it stays on continually while you are taking a video. Flash: allows you to set the flash options to Off or On. When you set the flash to On, it stays on continually while you are taking a video. Recording mode: allows you to set the recording mode to: Normal, which is limited only by available space on the destination location or Limit for MMS, which is limited by MMS size restrictions. on fid en Self portrait: allows you to activate the front facing camera so you can take videos of yourself or video chat. Multimedia 101 ry Anti-Shake: reduces image blur due to the movement of the subject of the photo or hand movement. GPS tag: allows you to turn GPS On or Off (also known as Geotagging). The location of where the picture is taken is attached to the picture. (Only available in Camera mode.) Before you can use the GPS tag (Geotagging), from the Home screen tap ➔ Settings ➔ Location services and tap Use GPS satellites to create a checkmark. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Exposure value: allows you to adjust the brightness level by moving the slider. Guidelines: allows you to turn the guidelines On or Off. ta Effects: allows you to change the color tone or apply special effects to the video. Options include: No effect, Cold vintage, Warm vintage, Posterize, Solarize, Green point, Blue point, Red-yellow point, Washed out, Cartoonify, Black and white, Sepia, and Negative. Timer: allows you to set a timer for how long to wait before taking a video. Options include: Off, 2 sec, 5 sec, and 10 sec. Resolution: allows you to set the image size to either: 1920x1080, 1280x720, 720x480, 640x480, or 320x240. fid en White balance: allows you to set this option to one of the following choices: Auto, Daylight, Cloudy, Incandescent, or Fluorescent. 102 on Outdoor visibility: allows you to maximize your photos taken while outdoors. Contextual filename: allows you to have your location added as part of the filename. You must first activate GPS tag described above. Save as flipped: when set to On, this option allows you to take and save a mirror-image video when using selfrecording mode. Video quality: allows you to set the image quality to: Superfine, Fine, or Normal. Storage: allows you to configure the default storage location for images or videos as either Phone or Memory card (if inserted). ta tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Image viewer: allows you to access the Image viewer and the various viewing options for a selected video. Image viewer options are described in the following section. The last video you took, will be displayed as a thumbnail in the Image viewer icon. ry Reset: allows you to reset all camera or camcorder settings to the default values. Viewing your Videos on fid en After you take a video, you can access various options from the Image Viewer. The Image Viewer uses your Gallery and the Video Player. For more information, refer to “Gallery” on page 93. Also, see“Video Player” on page 92. Multimedia 103 Section 7: Messaging Your phone provides the following message types: • Text Messages • Multimedia (Picture, Video, and Audio) Messages • Email and Gmail Messages • AT&T Messages • Google Talk • Google+ and Messenger Messages • ChatON on fid en The Short Message Service (SMS) lets you send and receive text messages to and from other mobile phones or email addresses. To use this feature, you may need to subscribe to your service provider’s message service. 104 ry ta Types of Messages The Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS) lets you send and receive multimedia messages (such as picture, video, and audio messages) to and from other mobile phones or email addresses. To use this feature, you may need to subscribe to your service provider’s multimedia message service. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie This section describes how to send and receive different types of messages. It also includes the features and functionality associated with messaging. Important! When creating a message, adding an image, a sound file, or a video clip to a text message changes the message from a text message to a multimedia message. Messaging icons are displayed at the top of the screen and indicate when messages are received and their type. For more information, refer to “Indicator Icons” on page 23. Creating and Sending Messages 1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging Compose. ➔ 4. Tap the Enter message field and use the on-screen keypad to enter a message. For more information, refer to “Entering Text” on page 66. ry Note: The main Home screen initially contains the Messaging icon. If you delete it, or if you want to access Messaging from another Home screen, you must tap Apps ➔ Messaging . 5. Add more recipients by tapping the recipient field. ta 6. Review your message and tap Send Note: If you exit a message before you send it, it will be automatically saved as a draft. 3. If adding a recipient from your Contacts, tap the contact to place a checkmark then tap Done. Message Options tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie 2. Tap on the Enter recipient field to manually enter a recipient or tap to select a recipient from your Contacts. The contact will be placed in the recipient field. Options before composing a message 1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging fid en Note: For the Group option, if the number of recipients is less than 10, all members in the group will be added. You will need to delete any unnecessary members in the list by selecting the trash can icon and deleting unwanted entries. on Note: Enter additional recipients by separating each entry with a semicolon (;) then using the previous procedure. 2. Before composing a message, press to reveal additional messaging options: • Search: allows you to search through all of your messages for a certain word or string of words. Enter a search string in the Messaging Search window and tap . • Delete threads: allows you to delete any message thread. Select the messages to delete and a green checkmark will appear next to the message. Tap Delete. • Draft messages: displays the draft messages folder and its contents. Messaging 105 • View contact: allows you to see information on the recipient. This option only appears if the recipient is in your Contacts list. • Add slide: allows you to add a new page to a message. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie • Spam messages: displays the spam messages folder and its contents. ry • Locked messages: displays the locked messages folder and its contents. • Add to Contacts: allows you to add the recipient to your Contacts list. This option only appears if the recipient is not already in your Contacts list. ta • Scheduled messages: displays the scheduled messages folder and its contents. • Settings: allows you to access Messaging settings. For more information, refer to “Messaging Settings” on page 109. Options while composing a message 1. While composing a message, press to reveal additional messaging options. • Call: allows you to call the contact. This option only appears if you have entered a phone number for the recipient. • Insert smiley: allows you to add emoticons, such as a happy face to your message. 106 on fid en • Add text: allows you to copy text from your contacts, calendar, or from a memo to add to your message. This is a convenient feature for adding names, phone numbers, events, etc. to your message. For more information, refer to “Adding Additional Text” on page 107. • Scheduled Message: allows you to assign the current message for scheduled delivery at a designated time. • Discard: allows you to delete the message. Adding attachments to a message To add an attachment to your message, tap and select one of the following options: • Images: allows you to tap an existing image from your Pictures list to add it to your message. • Take picture: allows you to temporarily exit the message, take a photo with phone’s camera, and then add it to your message by tapping Save. • Video: allows you to choose an existing video from the Videos list, then add it to your message. • Audio: allows you to choose an existing audio file from the Audio list, then add it to your message by tapping the circle to the right of the audio so that it turns green, then tapping Done. • S Note: allows you to insert text from an existing S Note. • Calendar: allows you to add the name, date, and time of a calendar event to your message. ry record a video clip using the phone’s camera, and then add it to your message by tapping Save. • Location: allows you to add an address and the link to the location on Google Maps. ta • Capture video: allows you to temporarily exit the message, • Contacts: allows you to add the name and phone number of any of your contacts to your message. record an audio clip using the phone’s microphone. It is then automatically attached to the message. • Text templates: allows you to add pre-defined phrases and sentences. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie • Record audio: allows you to temporarily exit the message and • S Note: allows you to add an S Note that you have created. • Calendar: allows you to add an event from your calendar. Select the desired event and tap Done. • Location: allows you to attach a thumbnail of a map showing your location. • Contacts: allows you to tap on an existing Address Book entry, fid en then add it to your message by tapping Done. Adding Additional Text on You can copy text such as names, phone numbers, and events from your Contacts, Calendar or a Memo. 1. While composing a message, press ➔ Add text. 2. At the Add text screen, select one of the following: The information is added to your message. Viewing New Received Messages 1. When you receive a new message, the new message icon will appear at the top of your screen. 2. Open the Notification Bar and select the message. For more information, refer to “Notification Bar” on page 45. – or – From the main Home screen, tap Messaging tap the new message to view it. then The selected message appears in the display. Messaging 107 4. To scroll through the message (if additional text pages have been added), touch the screen and in a single motion, scroll up or down the page. • Add to Contacts: displays the Contacts information screen. This option only displays if the sender is not in your Contacts list. ry • Delete thread: displays a confirmation dialog box that when pressed, deletes the entire thread. ta 3. To play a multimedia message, tap • To pause playback of the multimedia message, tap Deleting Messages tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Message Threads Sent and received text and picture messages are grouped into message threads. Threaded messages allow you to see all the messages exchanged (similar to a chat program) and displays a contact on the screen. Message threads are listed in the order in which they were received, with the latest message displayed at the top. Deleting a single message thread To open a threaded message follow these steps: 1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging Deleting multiple message threads Tap the message thread you want to view. 108 on fid en 2. Touch and hold the message thread to display the following options: • View contact: displays the contact’s information. This option only displays if the sender is in your Contacts list. 1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging 2. Touch and hold a message, then tap Delete thread. 3. At the Delete prompt, tap OK to delete or Cancel to cancel. 1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging 2. Press ➔ Delete threads. 3. Tap each message you want to delete. A checkmark will appear beside each message you select. 4. Tap Delete. 5. At the Delete prompt, tap OK to delete or Cancel to cancel. Message Search 2. Tap • Use the volume key: allows you to change the text size by using the up or down volume keys. General settings: tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie 3. Use the on-screen keypad to enter a word or phrase to search for, then tap ry ➔ Search. ta You can search through your messages by using the Message Search feature. 1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging • Split view: when in Landscape mode, allows you to view both the message list and the contents of the currently selected message. 4. All messages that contain the search string you entered are displayed. Messaging Settings To configure the settings for text messages, multimedia messages, Voice mails, and Push messages. 1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging ➔ ➔ Settings. 2. The following Messaging settings are available: fid en Display: • Bubble style: allows you to choose from several bubble styles for your messages. Bubbles are the rounded boxes that surround each message. on • Background style: allows you to choose from several background styles for your messages. • Delete old messages: deletes old messages when the limit is reached, rather than having them overwritten. • Text message limit: allows you to set a limit on how many text messages can be in one conversation. • Multimedia message limit: allows you to set a limit on how many multimedia messages can be in one conversation. • Text templates: allows you to edit or add new text templates to use in your messaging. Text message (SMS) settings: • Manage SIM card messages: allows you to manage the messages that you have stored on your SIM card. • Message center: allows you to enter the number of your Message center where your messages reside while the system is attempting to deliver them. Messaging 109 • Input mode: allows you to set the input mode for your text messages. Choose between GSM Alphabet, Unicode, or Automatic. Cell Broadcast (CB) settings: Multimedia message (MMS) settings: • Channel configuration: allows you to set up the channel that you will receive CB messages on. Notifications settings: tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie • Auto-retrieve: allows the message system to retrieve messages automatically. ta ry • CB activation: allows you to receive Cell Broadcast (CB) messages. • Creation mode: allows you to select the creation mode, Free, Restricted, or Warning. – Restricted: you can only create and submit messages with content belonging to the Core MM Content Domain. – Warning: the phone will warn you via pop up messages that you are creating a multimedia message which does not fit the Core MM Content Domain. – Free: you may add any content to the message. Push message settings: fid en • Alert when mode changes to MMS: allows you to receive an alert when MMS mode becomes active. 110 on • Push messages: allows you to receive push messages from the network. • Notifications: allows you to see message notifications on your status bar. • Select ringtone: allows you to set the ringtone for your message notifications. • Vibrate: allows you to configure the vibration mode associated with message alerts. Choose from: Always, Only in silent mode, or Never. • Message alert repetition: allows you to set the interval for new message alerts. Choose from: Once, Every 2 minutes, or Every 10 minutes. • Preview message: when enabled, allows you to view a preview of new message text on the Status bar. Signature settings: • Add signature: when enabled, this feature allows you to create a signature at the end of your outgoing text messages. 2. Enter you email address in the Email address field. • Signature text: allows you to enter a desired signature for your message. 4. If you want to see your password as it is being typed, tap Show password to create a checkmark. Spam message settings: 5. Tap Next. • Spam settings: when enabled, allows you to configure available spam settings such as: 6. At the Account options screen, tap any of the options you would like. • Register number as spam: allows you to manually enter and assign a phone number as being sent from a spam source. 7. Tap Next. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie ta ry 3. Enter your password in the Password field. • Register phrase as spam: allows you to assign a specific text phrase as belonging to a spam message. Ex: Dear friend. • Block unknown senders: when active, automatically blocks incoming messages from unknown sources or blocked numbers. Using Email Creating an Email Account 1. From the Home screen, tap fid en Email enables you to review and create email using various email services. You can also receive text message alerts when you receive an important email. ➔ Email on Your accounts screen displays with an Email setup screen displayed. 8. Enter a name for this email account (optional). 9. Tap Done. Creating a Corporate Email Account Use the following procedure to configure your phone to synchronize with a corporate email account. ➔ Email 1. From the Home screen, tap Your accounts screen displays with an Email setup screen displayed. 2. Enter you email address in the Email address field. 3. Enter your password in the Password field. 4. If you want to see your password as it is being typed, tap Show password to create a checkmark. Messaging 111 Your Email screen displays showing your emails from the active account. 5. If you want all of your emails sent from this email account by default, tap checkbox to create a checkmark. 2. Press 6. Tap Manual setup. 3. Tap 7. Tap the Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync field. 4. Enter the information required to set up another account. For more information, refer to “Creating an Email Account” on page 111. 9. At the Activation prompt, tap OK. The Account options screen is displayed. 10. Enter the desired information in the different fields, then tap Next. 11. Enter an Account name for this account (Optional) and tap Done. Wait for the Inbox to synchronize before use. 12. Press ➔ Settings to change the account settings. fid en Creating Additional Email Accounts on To create additional email accounts after setting up your first account, follow these steps: ➔ Email 1. From the Home screen, tap 112 ry ta tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie 8. Enter all the Exchange server information, Domain, User name and Password, then tap Next. ➔ Settings. to add another email account. Switching Between Email Accounts 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Email Your Email screen displays showing your emails from the active account. 2. Tap the Inbox button at the top of your screen that displays the optional name you assigned to your active email account, for example, Work, Gmail, etc. Your Email accounts screen is displayed. 3. Tap the Email account you would like to switch to. You can also select Combined view which will display email messages from all accounts. 4. The new Email account is displayed. Signing into Your Gmail 4. Enter the subject of this message in the Subject field. 5. Tap the Compose email field and begin composing your message. 1. Sign on to your Google account if you are not already signed on. For more information, refer to “Creating a New Google Account” on page 13. ➔ Gmail 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. The Inbox loads conversations and email. Creating a Gmail Message to send. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie 6. Tap Note: You must sign in to your Gmail account in order to access Gmail. 2. From the Home screen, tap and select Add Cc/Bcc to add a carbon or blind ry Gmail is Google’s web-based email. When you first setup the phone, Gmail is configured. Depending on the synchronization settings, Gmail is automatically synchronized with your Gmail account. 3. Tap copy. ta Using Gmail Viewing a Gmail Message 1. From the Gmail Inbox, tap a message to view it. 2. The following options are available at the bottom of the screen after a message has been selected: • Archive : archives the selected message. • Delete : deletes the message. • Labels : allows you to attach labels to a message. This is similar to putting it in a folder. • Mark Unread : after reading a message, marks as unread. fid en • Newer: swipe your screen to the right to see newer messages. 1. From the Gmail Inbox, tap at the bottom of the screen to create a new message. on 2. Enter the recipients Email address in the To field. Separate multiple recipient email addresses with a comma. • Older: swipe your screen to the left to see older messages. 3. Press to select one of the following additional options: • Mark important/not important: allows you to set the importance of a message. Messaging 113 • Settings: displays Email settings that you can modify. • Send feedback: allows you to send feedback or report a problem. Other Gmail Options 1. Tap at the bottom of the screen to refresh the screen, send and receive new emails, and synchronize your email with the Gmail account. 2. Tap at the bottom of the screen to set up and manage Labels for your Gmail messages. on fid en 3. Tap at the bottom of the screen to search through your Gmail messages. 114 Google Talk is a free Windows and web-based application for instant messaging offered by Google. Conversation logs are automatically saved to a Chats area in your Gmail account. This allows you to search a chat log and store them in your Gmail accounts. 1. Log on to your Google account if you have not already done so. For more information, refer to “Creating a New Google Account” on page 13. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie • Help: displays the Google.com webpage so you can search the web for help. Google Talk ry • Report spam: allows you to report a message as spam. Tap the UNDO option if you change your mind. ta • Mute: allows you to mute the sound in a message if applicable. 2. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Talk 3. Begin using Google Talk. 4. Press ➔ Help for more information on using Google Talk. Note: The Network confirms your login and processes. This could take up to 5 minutes to complete. Google + Google+ makes messaging and sharing with your friends a lot easier. You can set up Circles of friends, visit the Stream to get updates from your Circles, use Messenger for fast ➔ Google+ 3. Tap Learn more for more detailed information. ry 4. Select the account you want to use to sign in to Google+. – or – Tap Add account to create another account. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie 2. From the Home screen, tap From the Google+ application, select Messenger. ta messaging with everyone in your Circles, or use Instant Upload to automatically upload videos and photos to your own private album on Google+. 1. Sign on to your Google account. For more information, refer to “Creating a New Google Account” on page 13. 3. Select the account you want to use to sign in to Google+. – or – 5. At the Messenger screen, tap message. 6. In the upper text field, enter a name, email address, or circle. Tap Add account to create another account. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions to use Google+. 5. Visit www.google.com/mobile/+/ for more information. Messenger fid en Messenger allows you to bring groups of friends together into a simple group conversation. When you get a new conversation in Messenger, Google+ sends an update to your phone. 1. Sign on to your Google account. For more information, refer to “Creating a New Google Account” on page 13. ➔ Messenger on 2. From the Home screen, tap – or – to start a new 7. In the bottom message field, enter a message then tap Messages App AT&T Messages brings your texts, calls, and voicemail messages together into a single conversation thread and is accessible by phone or computer. ➔ Messages 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Sign on to your Google account if you are not already signed on. For more information, refer to “Creating a New Google Account” on page 13. Messaging 115 ry Important! The Samsung account manages the access information (username/password) to several applications, such as AllShare Play, ChatON, and Media Hub. ta Note: The first time you use the Messages app, you will need to download the updated application from the Play Store. When the Play Store page displays, tap Update. For more information, refer to “Play Store” on page 194. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie For more information, visit: https://web.samsungchaton.com. 3. At the Welcome screen, read the information and tap Continue or tap Learn More to receive more information. 4. The first time you use Messages, you will need to set up a few things. Tap Record Greeting to record a personal greeting, or tap Skip if you want to do it later. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions to use the Messages app. ChatON 116 on fid en Provides a global mobile communication service where you can chat with more than 2 buddies via a group chat. Share things such as pictures, videos, animation messages (Scribbles), audio, Contacts, Calendar entries, and Location information. Registering with the Service 1. Confirm you have already logged in to your Samsung account. Note: There should be no (Samsung account icon) in the Notifications area of the screen. . 4. Tap (Add buddy) and confirm your new buddy appears in the Buddies tab. Note: For more information, press Help. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie 3. Select either the Terms and conditions or Privacy policy and read the on-screen information. Tap Accept to continue. 3. Enter the information and tap . Once the recipient is matched, their entry appears in the Results area. ry ➔ ChatON ta 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Read the on-screen notification about data charges and tap OK. 4. Select a country code, enter your current phone number to register with the service, and tap Done. 5. Choose to receive the verification code via either SMS (text message) or Voice to your device. Note: If you opt to receive the verification code via SMS, this information is sent directly to your device. Once received, the Verification field is automatically filled in. Using ChatON for Chatting 1. From the Home screen, tap OK. 1. From the Home screen, tap 3. Enter your message using the on-screen text entry method. Send to send the message. fid en Adding Your First Chat On Buddy ➔ ChatON 2. Tap the Buddies tab and select a buddy to initiate your chat. 4. Tap 6. Enter your real name and tap and tap General ➔ ➔ ChatON 2. Tap Add buddy and choose a search method. • Address : to search by Country code and phone number. on • Search by Samsung Account ID a known samsung account ID. : to search by using Messaging 117 Deleting a single message bubble Buddy’s Bubble 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ ChatON ry 2. Launch a chat session to reveal the message string. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie ta 3. Touch and hold a message bubble, then select Delete. Text Message Thread My Bubble fid en To reply to a ChatON message: 1. While the chat session is active, tap the Enter message field and then type your reply message. 3. Tap 118 Send on 2. Compose your reply. Your texts are colored Blue and your buddy’s messages are white. to deliver your reply. Section 8: Changing Your Settings From any Home screen, tap – or – From any Home screen, press ➔ Settings 2. Tap Advanced. ➔ Settings. The following options are available: • Network notification: alerts you when a new WAP is available. The Settings screen displays. Wi-Fi Settings This section describes the Wi-Fi settings. For information on how to use Wi-Fi, see “Wi-Fi” on page 160. Activating Wi-Fi 1. From the Home screen, tap The advanced Wi-Fi settings allow you to set up and manage wireless access points. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ Wi-Fi. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie 䡲 ry Accessing Settings Advanced Wi-Fi Settings ta This section explains the settings used for customizing your device. ➔ Settings ➔ Wi-Fi. fid en 2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Wi-Fi field, to turn Wi-Fi ON ON . on 3. Tap Scan to scan for available Wi-Fi networks. For more information, refer to “Connect to a Wi-Fi Network” on page 161. • Keep Wi-Fi on during sleep: allows you to specify when to disconnect from Wi-Fi. • Check for Internet service: Checks if Wi-Fi internet service is available when connected to an AP (Access Point). • Auto connect: allows you to be automatically connected to an AT&T Wi-Fi Hotspot as soon as your phone detects it. • MAC address: view your device’s MAC address, required when connecting to some secured networks (not configurable). • IP address: view your device’s IP address. Changing Your Settings 119 Activating Bluetooth 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings. 2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Bluetooth field, to turn Bluetooth ON ON . The Bluetooth icon is displayed. Additional Bluetooth Settings When Bluetooth is on, additional settings are available. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ Bluetooth. and select a Bluetooth setting to configure: on 120 fid en 2. Tap Scan to scan for nearby discoverable devices. After searching, tap a device to pair with it. For more information, refer to “Pairing Bluetooth Devices” on page 166. 3. Press ry • Visible time-out: Use this setting to control when to automatically turn off the Discoverable option: 2 minutes, 5 minutes, 1 hour, or Never timeout. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie In this menu you can activate Bluetooth, view or assign a device name, activate your phone so other Bluetooth devices can discover it, or scan for other, available Bluetooth devices with which to pair. • Rename device: Your device’s default name displays on screen. Tap to change the device name. Available when Bluetooth is turned On. ta Bluetooth settings • Received files: Show the list of files received by using Bluetooth. 4. Tap the checkbox next to SAMSUNG-SGH-I317 if you do not want your phone visible to other Bluetooth devices. Data Usage From this screen you can view your Mobile data usage and turn your Mobile data capability On or Off. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ Data usage. 2. Tap Mobile data to create a checkmark and turn Mobile data usage on. 3. Tap Set mobile data limit to create a checkmark and allow a data limit to be set. 4. Touch and drag the red limit bar to the GB limit that you desire. ry Airplane mode Airplane mode allows you to use many of your phone’s features, such as Camera, Games, and more, when you are in an airplane or in any other area where making or receiving calls or data is prohibited. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie The data usage displays as a visual (chart) and also displays a list of each application with a breakdown of how much data was used per application. Options display for Airplane mode, Mobile networks, Tethering and portable hotspots, VPN, NFC, S Beam, Nearby devices, AllShare Cast, and Kies via Wi-Fi. ta 5. Tap the Data usage cycle drop-down menu and select a date. Note: Data is measured by your device. Your service provider may account for data usage differently. 6. Press to display additional options. Tap to activate. • Data roaming: enables Data roaming on your device. • Restrict background data: restricts some apps and services from working unless you are connected to a Wi-Fi network. • Auto-sync data: allows your accounts to automatically sync • Show Wi-Fi usage: displays a Wi-Fi tab that shows Wi-Fi usage. More Settings fid en • Mobile hotspots: displays available mobile hotspots. This option displays additional Connectivity information. From the Home screen, tap settings. ➔ Settings ➔ More on 䡲 Important! When your phone is in Airplane Mode, it cannot send or receive any calls or access online information or applications. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings. 2. Tap More settings located under the Connectivity heading. 3. Tap Airplane mode. A check mark displayed next to the feature indicates Airplane mode is active. 4. At the Airplane mode prompt, tap OK. The Airplane mode icon your screen. is displayed at the top of Changing Your Settings 121 2. Tap Mobile data to create a checkmark and activate the feature. Data Roaming fid en Data roaming allows you to connect to your service provider’s partner networks and access data services when you are out of your service providers area of coverage. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ More settings ➔ Mobile networks. 2. Tap Data roaming to create a checkmark and activate the feature. Access Point Names on To use Wi-Fi you need access to a wireless access point (hotspot). 122 2. Tap Access Point Names. A list of the Access Point names display. The active access point displays a green, filled circle to the right of the name. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie To enable data access over the mobile network, this option must be selected. It is set on by default. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ More settings ➔ Mobile networks. ➔ Settings ➔ More ry Before you use applications such as Google Maps and find your location or search for places of interest, you must enable the Mobile networks options. Mobile data 1. From the Home screen, tap settings ➔ Mobile networks. ta Mobile networks Network Operators Using this feature you can view the current network connection. You can also scan and select a network operator manually, or set the network selection to Automatic. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ More settings ➔ Mobile networks. 2. Tap Network operators. The current network connection displays at the bottom of the list. Important! You must deactivate data service prior to searching for an available network. 3. Tap Search networks to manually search for a network. 4. Tap Select automatically to automatically select a network connection. Note: Connecting to 2G networks slows the data transfer speed and time. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ More settings ➔ Tethering and portable hotspot. ry 2. Connect your phone to your PC using a USB cable. 3. Tap USB tethering to add a checkmark and activate the feature. The USB tethering icon is displayed at the top of your screen. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Your phone default is set to Automatic (to automatically search for an available network. You can set this option to Manual to select a network each time you connect. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ More settings ➔ Mobile networks. ta Default setup options 2. Tap Network operators. 3. Tap Default setup. 4. Tap Manual to locate and connect to a network manually, or tap Automatic to allow the device to automatically select a network. Tethering & portable hotspot on fid en This option allows you to share your phones’s mobile data connection via USB or as a portable Wi-Fi hotspot. USB tethering 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Tethering and... – or – Portable Wi-Fi hotspot 1. From the Home screen, tap – or – ➔ Tethering and... From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ More settings ➔ Tethering and portable hotspots ➔ Portable Wi-Fi hotspot. 2. Turn Portable Wi-Fi hotspots on by tapping the slider so that it changes to the ON position ON . The Portable Wi-Fi hotspot icon top of your screen. is displayed at the 3. Tap Configure at the bottom of the screen. 4. Enter or edit the Network SSID, Hide my device, Security setting, and Password. Changing Your Settings 123 • Help: provides additional information. Connecting to Portable Wi-Fi hotspot from other devices 1. Activate Wi-Fi on the device that wants to connect to your phone. 2. Find [SGHI317_xxxx] in the Wi-Fi network list and connect to it. XXXX are four randomly generated digits that will appear when you set up a Portable Wi-Fi hotspot on your device. fid en The connected device can now use internet through your Portable Wi-Fi hotspot. on Note: Activating Wi-Fi and connecting to your phone will be different depending on the type of the other device. 124 From the Tethering and portable hotspot menu, tap Help for additional information VPN settings The VPN settings menu allows you to set up and manage Virtual Private Networks (VPNs). tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie 7. Press for the following options: • Timeout settings: allows you to set the time your device will be available as a portable Wi-Fi hotspot. 䡲 ry 6. Tap Save. Help ta 5. Tap Show password and Show advanced options to see them displayed. Important! Before you can use a VPN you must establish and configure one. Adding a Basic VPN Before you add a VPN you must determine which VPN protocol to use: PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol), L2TP (Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol), L2TP/IPSec PSK (Preshared key based L2TP/IPSec), or L2TP/IPSec CRT (Certificate based L2TP/IPSec). 1. Before using VPN, you must first set up a screen unlock PIN or password. For more information, refer to “Lock Screen Settings” on page 134. 2. From the Home screen, tap settings ➔ VPN. 3. Tap Basic VPN. ➔ Settings ➔ More 6. Select a VPN type from the Type drop-down menu. The options are: • PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol) 2. From the Home screen, tap settings ➔ VPN. ➔ Settings ➔ More 3. Tap Advanced IPsec VPN. ry 5. Enter a name for the VPN network in the Name field. 4. Tap Add VPN connection. ta 4. Tap Add VPN network. 5. Enter a password and tap OK. 6. Enter a name for the VPN connection in the VPN connection name field. • L2TP/IPSec RSA 7. Select a IPsec type from the drop-down menu. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie • L2TP/IPSec PSK (Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol / Internet Protocol Security Pre-Shared Key) • IPSec Xauth PSK 8. Enter any other required information. • IPSec Xauth RSA 9. Tap the Show advanced options check box to display additional VPN options. • IPSec Hybrid RSA 7. Enter the Server address and any other required fields that are dependent upon the Type you entered previously. fid en 8. Tap the Show advanced options check box to display additional VPN options. 9. Tap Save to save your VPN settings. Adding an IPsec VPN on 1. Before using VPN, you must first set up a screen unlock PIN or password. For more information, refer to “Lock Screen Settings” on page 134. 10. Tap Save to save your VPN settings. NFC NFC (Near Field Communication) allows data exchange when you touch your device with another compatible device. This is used for applications such as S Beam. To activate NFC, follow these steps: 1. From the Home screen, tap and transfer. ➔ Settings ➔ Share 2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the NFC field, to turn NFC ON ON . Changing Your Settings 125 5. Verify screen. S Beam When S Beam is activated, you can beam files to another NFC-capable device by holding the devices close together. You can beam images and videos from your Gallery, music files from your Music Player, and more. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ Share and transfer ➔ S Beam. ry 6. At the Nearby devices prompt, tap OK. ta 7. Tap Shared contents, then check the media you would like to share. Tap OK. 8. Tap Device name, then use the on-screen keyboard to change the name shown to others. Tap Save. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie 2. Tap the OFF / ON icon to turn S Beam on ON 9. Tap Access control, then what devices are allowed access. Choose from Allow all or Only allowed devices. The allowed devices are configured in the following Allowed devices list. 3. Touch the back of your device with another NFCcapable device and the content is transferred. Nearby devices (Nearby devices) appears at the top of the 10. Tap Allowed devices list, then select the connected devices you would like to allow. 2. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ Share and transfer ➔ Nearby devices. 12. Tap Download to, then select the destination of any downloaded (shared) content. Choose from USB storage (phone) or SD card. fid en This option allows you to share your media files with nearby devices using DLNA and connected to the same Wi-Fi. 1. Connect to a Wi-Fi network. For more information, refer to “Activating Wi-Fi” on page 119. 3. Verify Wi-Fi Direct is enabled and you are paired with the device you wish to detect and share content with. 126 on 4. Tap the OFF / ON icon to turn File sharing ON ON 11. Tap Not-allowed devices list, then select the connected devices you would like to not allow. 2. From the Home screen, tap and transfer ➔ AllShare Cast. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie With AllShare Cast, you can wirelessly share your phone's screen with Wi-Fi-enabled TV using the AllShare Cast Hub accessory. 1. Confirm you have already logged in to your Samsung account. There should be no icon in the Notifications area of the screen. Note: This feature allows a connection between your phone and the optional AllShare Cast Hub, via a shared Wi-Fi connection. The AllShare Cast Hub then allows the communicating TV to mirror what is being shown on the phone's display. ry AllShare Cast 5. Follow the on-screen instructions to connect with the TV. ta 13. Tap Upload from other devices, then select the actions you’ll take when you upload content from other devices. Choose from either Always accept, Always ask, or Always reject. ➔ Settings ➔ Share 3. Tap the OFF / ON icon to turn AllShare Cast on ON . fid en 4. Make sure you and the device you want to share with are connected to the same Wi-Fi network. For more information, refer to “Connect to a Wi-Fi Network” on page 161. on Your phone automatically scans for other compatible devices. Kies via Wi-Fi Kies via Wi-Fi allows you to sync your PC wirelessly with your device provided they are both on the same Wi-Fi network. You can view and share videos, photos, music, ringtones, and more. 1. From your PC, download the Samsung Kies application if you don’t already have it. You can find it at samsung.com. 2. From your PC, launch the Samsung Kies application. 3. From your PC, connect to a Wi-Fi network. 4. From the Home screen, tap and transfer ➔ Kies via Wi-Fi. ➔ Settings ➔ Share Changing Your Settings 127 tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Home screen mode allows you to set your display to the conventional layout of Basic mode or provide an easier user experience for the first-time smartphone users using Easy mode. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ Home screen mode. When Blocking mode is enabled, notifications for selected features will be disabled. You will only receive notifications of incoming calls from people on your allowed list. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ Blocking mode. ry Home screen mode Blocking Mode ta 5. From your device, connect to the same Wi-Fi network that your PC is connected to if you have not already done so. For more information, refer to “Connect to a Wi-Fi Network” on page 161. 2. Tap the pull-down dropbox and select one of the following options: • Basic mode: provides conventional layout for the apps and widgets on your home screens. 128 on 3. Tap Apply. fid en • Easy mode: provides easier user experience for first-time smartphone users on the home screens. 2. In a single motion touch and slide the Blocking mode slider to the right to turn it on ON Confirm that the Blocking mode active icon appears in the Status bar. 3. Place a green checkmark adjacent to those features you would like to enable. Choose from: Disable incoming calls, Disable notifications, Disable alarm and timer, Disable LED indicator. 4. Configure a timeframe for these features to be active. Remove the checkmark from the Always field to configure the From and To time fields. contacts, Favorites, or Custom. Allowed contacts will then appear in the Allowed contact list. From this menu you can control the sounds on the phone. 䡲 From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ Sound. The following options display: Device ringtone This option allows you to set the ringtone. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ Sound. 3. Tap a ringtone and tap OK. The Volume option allows you to change the volume for all phone sounds in one easy location. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ Sound ➔ Volume. fid en 2. Touch and drag the slider to adjust the sound volume for Media, Ringtone, Notifications, and System. 3. Tap OK. 2. Touch and drag the slider to adjust the Vibration intensity for Incoming call, Notification, and Haptic feedback. 2. Tap Device ringtone. Volume Vibration intensity ➔ Settings ➔ Sound tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Sound Settings 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Vibration intensity. ry exempted from these rules. Choose from None, All ta 5. Tap Allowed contacts to assign those contacts that are on Vibration intensity allows you to select how intense the vibration is for different options. Device vibration This option allows you to set your phone to vibrate and ring. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ Sound. 2. Tap Device vibration. 3. Select a vibration pattern and tap OK. Default notifications This option allows you to set the ringtone that will sound for notifications and alarms. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ Sound. 2. Tap Default notifications. Changing Your Settings 129 3. Tap a ringtone and tap OK. Sound and vibration 䡲 From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ Display. The following options display: System Tone Settings The System tone settings are used when you use the dialing pad, make a screen selection, lock your screen, or tap the screen. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ Sound. 2. Tap any of the following options to create a checkmark and activate the feature: • Keytones: makes a sound when you tap a key on the keyboard. • Wallpaper: allows you to set the Wallpaper for your Home screen, Lock screen, or both. For more information, refer to “Changing the Wallpaper” on page 42. • LED indicator: allows you to turn on your LED lights for charging, low battery, incoming notifications, and voice recording. The light will turn on by default unless you turn them off. • Screen lock sound: makes a sound when your screen is locked or unlocked. • Page buddy: allows context related pages to be created on the Home screen. You can select S Pen page, Earphones page, Docking page, and Roaming page. Tap Page buddy help for more information. • Haptic feedback: makes a vibration when you tap soft keys and on certain UI interactions. • Screen mode: allows you to select from several different color modes. on fid en • Touch sounds: makes a sound when you touch the screen. 130 In this menu, you can change various settings for the display. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie 2. Tap Sound and vibration to create a checkmark and enable the feature. Display Settings ta This option allows you to enable all sounds and vibrations. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ Sound. ry • Auto haptic: allows your device to automatically vibrate in response to the sounds of downloadable apps, such as games. Tap the ON/OFF slider to turn Auto haptic ON. From this menu you can view the memory allocation for the memory card and USB as well as mount or unmount the SD card. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie • Screen timeout: adjusts the delay time before the screen automatically turns off. Selections are: 15 seconds, 30 seconds, 1 minute, 2 minutes, 5 minutes, and 10 minutes. Storage ta • Auto-rotate screen: allows you to switch the display orientation automatically when you rotate the phone. • Auto adjust screen tone: allows you to save power because the phone analyzes the displayed screen image and adjusts the LCD brightness. ry • Brightness: configures the LCD Brightness levels. Tap Automatic brightness to allow the phone to self-adjust or drag the slider and tap OK. • Smart rotation: disables the auto screen rotation by checking the orientation of your face and the device. • Smart stay: disables the screen timeout if your phone detects that your face is watching the screen. • Font style: allows you to set the font style that your phone will use. You can also tap Get fonts online to choose from a wider selection. • Font size: allows you to select which size of font is displayed. fid en • Touch key light duration: allows you to adjust the delay before the Touch key light automatically turns off. on • Display battery percentage: allows you to see the battery charge percentage next to the battery charge icon at the top of the display. For more information about mounting or unmounting the SD card, see “Memory Card” on page 46. To view the memory allocation for your external SD card: 䡲 From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ Storage.The available memory displays under the Total space and Available space headings for both Device memory and SD card. SD card 䡲 Tap Unmount SD card to unmount your SD card so that you can safely remove it, then tap OK. – or – 1. Tap Format SD card to re-format your SD card. This will delete all data on your SD card including music, videos, and photos. Changing Your Settings 131 Note: The Format SD card option is only available when your SD card is mounted. Power Saving Mode allows you to manage your phone to conserve power. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ Power saving. 2. Tap the OFF / ON icon next to Power saving to turn Power saving mode on ON . fid en 3. Tap the following options to create a checkmark and conserve power: • CPU power saving: allows you to limit the maximum performance of the CPU. • Screen power saving: allows you to lower the screen power level. on • Background color: allows you to change the background color on email and internet to save power. 132 4. Tap Learn about power saving to learn about various ways to conserve battery power. Battery See how much battery power is used for device activities. 1. From a Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ Battery. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Power Saving • Turn off haptic feedback: allows you to turn off vibration when you tap or touch the screen. ry to cancel. ta 2. Tap Format SD card again. 3. Tap Delete all to continue or press The battery level displays in percentage. The amount of time the battery was used also displays. Battery usage displays in percentages per application. 2. Tap Screen, Cell standby, Android System, Android OS, or any other listed application to view how it is affecting battery use. Note: Other applications may be running that affect battery use. Applications Manager You can download and install applications from Play Store or create applications using the Android SDK and install them on your device. Use Application manager settings to manage applications. ry 3. To switch the order of the lists displayed in the Downloaded tabs, press ➔ Sort by size or Sort by name. 4. Tap an application to view and update information about the application, including memory usage, default settings, and permissions. ta Warning! Because this device can be configured with system software not provided by or supported by Google or any other company, end-users operate these devices at their own risk. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Memory Usage See how memory is being used by Downloaded or Running applications. 1. From a Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ Applications manager. 2. Tap Downloaded, Running, or All to display memory usage for that category of applications. The graph at the bottom of the Downloaded tab shows used and free device memory. The graph at the bottom of the Running tab shows used and free RAM. Downloaded fid en Displays apps you have downloaded onto your device. 1. From a Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ Applications manager. on 2. Tap the Downloaded tab to view a list of all the downloaded applications on your device. Running Services View and control services running on your device. 1. From a Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ Applications manager. 2. Tap the Running tab. All the applications that are currently running on the device display. 3. Tap Show cached processes to display all the cached processes that are running. Tap Show services in use to switch back. 4. Tap one of the applications to view application information. The following options display: • Stop: Stops the application from running on the device. This is usually done prior to uninstalling the application. Changing Your Settings 133 • Report: Report failure and other application information. Screen Lock ry Choose settings for unlocking your screen. For more information about using the lock and unlock features, see “Locking and Unlocking the Touch Screen” on page 12. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie 1. From the Home screen, tap screen. Note: Options vary by application. ➔ Settings ➔ Lock 2. Tap Screen lock for these options: • Swipe: Swipe the screen to unlock it. Location Services The Location services settings allow you to set up how the phone will determine your location and the sensor settings for your phone. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ More settings ➔ Location services. fid en 2. Tap any of the following options to create a checkmark and activate the service: • Use wireless networks: allows applications to use data from mobile networks and Wi-Fi to help determine your location. • Use GPS satellites: allows applications to use GPS to pinpoint your location. on • Location and Google search: allows Google to use your location data for improved search results and other services. 134 Lock Screen Settings ta Warning! Not all services can be stopped. Stopping services may have undesirable consequences on the application or Android System. • Motion: While tapping and holding the screen, tilt the device forward to unlock. • Face unlock: Look at your phone to unlock it. • Face and voice: Look at your phone and speak to unlock. • Pattern: A screen unlock pattern is a touch gesture you create and use to unlock your device. Follow the prompts to create or change your screen unlock pattern. • PIN: Select a PIN to use for unlocking the screen. • Password: Create a password for unlocking the screen. • None: No pattern, PIN, or password is required. The screen will never lock. Lock screen options Activate or deactivates various Unlock screen functions. • Ripple effect activates/deactivates the ripple effect on the lock screen when you tap it. ta ➔ Settings ➔ Lock • Camera quick access provides you with quick access to the camera function from the Lock screen. When this option has been activated, touch and hold the lock screen while rotating the device to the landscape position then release the screen. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie 1. From the Home screen, tap screen ➔ Lock screen options. ry • Help text shows help information on the Lock screen. Note: The Lock screen options are only available when the Screen lock option is set to Swipe or Motion. 2. The following options are available: • Shortcuts sets shortcuts to appear at the bottom of the Lock screen. • Information ticker sets the news and stock information ticker to appear across the bottom of the Lock screen. • Clock allows you to display the digital clock while the Lock screen is active. Enabled by default. fid en • Dual clock displays a set of dual digital clock on the Lock screen while you are traveling. Tap the entry to set your home city. This time zone then becomes the time used by one of these on-screen clocks. on • Weather displays the current area weather on the Lock screen. Tap and set both the temperature units (F or C) and a refresh time. • Wake up in lock screen requires that you say a command to wake-up S Voice. • Set wake-up command designates your S Voice wake-up commands. Tap Wake-up S Voice and follow the on-screen prompts to create a new verbal command. Note: These options vary depending on the selected Lock settings. Owner information This option allows you to show owner information on the lock screen. You can also enter text to display on the lock screen. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ Lock screen ➔ Owner information. Changing Your Settings 135 Tip: Make sure your battery is charged more than 80 percent. Encryption may take an hour or more. 3. Enter text that you would like displayed on your lockscreen and tap OK. Set up/change password The Security settings allow you to determine the security level for your phone. Encryption ta 2. Enter a new password and tap Confirm. To require a numeric PIN or password to decrypt your phone each time you power it on or encrypt the data on your SD card each time it is connected: 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ Security. 2. Tap Encrypt device. For more information, read the displayed help screen. on fid en 3. Tap Encrypt external SD card to enable the encryption on SD card data that requires a password be entered each time the microSD card is connected. 136 Use this option to set up your password when one is first required or change your current password. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ Security ➔ Set up/change password. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Security ry 2. Tap the Show owner info on lock screen checkbox to create a checkmark if you want your owner information displayed. 3. Enter the new password again and tap Confirm. Set up SIM card lock Prevent another user from using your SIM card to make unauthorized calls or from accessing information stored on your SIM card by protecting the information using a PIN code. When enabled, your phone will ask for a PIN number each time you use the phone. Using this option you can also change your SIM PIN number. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ Security. 2. Tap Set up SIM card lock. 4. Tap Change SIM PIN. 5. Enter your old SIM PIN code and tap OK. 6. Enter your new SIM PIN code and tap OK. 7. Re-type your new SIM PIN code and tap OK. Make passwords visible When enabled, password characters display briefly as you touch them while entering passwords. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ Security. fid en 2. Tap Make passwords visible to create a checkmark and enable or disable the display of password characters. on ry The Device Administration feature allows you to select one or more administration applications that control your device for security purposes (for example, if your phone is lost of stolen). These applications enforce remote or local device security policies. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Note: You must activate Lock SIM card before you can change your SIM PIN code. Device Administrators ta 3. Tap Lock SIM card, enter your SIM PIN code, then tap OK. Some of the features a device administration application might control are: • Setting the number of failed password attempts before the device is restored to factory settings. • Automatically locking the device. • Restoring factory settings on the device. Note: If a device uses multiple enabled administration applications, the strictest policy is enforced. 1. From the Home screen, tap Security. ➔ Settings ➔ 2. Tap Device administrators. 3. Select a device administrator and follow the prompts. If no device administrators are listed, you can download them from the Play Store. Changing Your Settings 137 A check mark is displayed to indicate it is active. Warning! Enabling this option causes your phone and personal data to be more vulnerable to attack by applications from unknown sources. Trusted Credentials fid en If a certificate authority (CA) certificate gets compromised or for some other reason you do not trust it, you can disable or remove it. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ Security. 2. Tap Trusted credentials. The trusted credentials screen has two tabs: on • System: Displays CA certificates that are permanently installed in the ROM of your device. 138 A scrolling screen displays the details. 4. Scroll to the bottom of the details screen and tap Disable to disable a System certificate or Remove to remove a User certificate. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie 2. Tap Unknown sources. 3. Tap a CA certificate to examine its details. ry This feature allows you to download and install non-Market applications. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ Security. • User: Displays any CA certificates that you installed, for example, in the process of installing a client certificate. ta Unknown sources Caution! When you disable a system CA certificate, the Disable button changes to Enable, so you can enable the certificate again, if necessary. When you remove a user-installed CA certificate, it is permanently deleted and must be re-installed, if needed. 5. Tap OK to return to the certificate list. When enabled, a check mark appears in the check box. Install from device storage Install encrypted certificates from an installed memory card. Note: You must have installed a memory card containing encrypted certificates to use this feature. ➔ Settings ➔ • Calculator: allows you to adjust the position of the calculator keypad to the left or the right to make it easier to use with one hand. ta 2. Tap Install from device storage, then choose a certificate and follow the prompts to install. • Samsung keyboard: allows you to adjust the position of the Samsung keyboard to the left or the right to make it easier to use with one hand. ry 1. From the Home screen, tap Security. Clear credentials tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Clear stored credentials. Note: This setting only appears if you have installed encrypted certificates. 1. From the Home screen, tap Security. ➔ Settings ➔ 2. Tap Clear credentials to remove all certificates. One-handed operation fid en The one-handed operation settings help you to use your phone keypads easily with only one hand. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ Onehanded operation. on 2. The following options are available: • Keypad & in-call buttons: allows you to adjust the position of the dialing keypad and in-call buttons to the left or the right to make it easier to use with one hand. • Unlock pattern: allows you to adjust the scale of the unlock pattern for use with one hand. • Learn about on-handed operation: provides more information about using one-handed operation. Language and input This menu allows you to configure the language in which to display the menus. You can also set onscreen keyboard options. Language You can change the language used by your device by following these steps: 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ Language and input ➔ Language. 2. Tap a language from the list. Changing Your Settings 139 2. Tap Default and select a keyboard. Select Samsung keyboard or Swype. 3. Tap Set up input methods. icon next to the input method that you 4. Tap the would like to configure the settings for. 5. Based on your selection of input method, the appropriate settings will appear and are explained below. Google voice typing settings 2. Tap the fid en From this menu you can set Samsung keyboard options. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ Language and input. icon next to Google voice typing. 140 on 3. The following options are available: ry • Block offensive words: tap to create a checkmark and enable the blocking of recognized offensive words from the results of your voice-input Google typing. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie You can change the keyboard used by your device by following these steps: 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ Language and input. • Choose input languages: tap on a language that you want to input. Select Automatic to use the local language or select a language from the list. ta Keyboards and Input Methods • Download offline speech recognition: Enables voice input while offline. Samsung Keyboard settings From this menu you can set Samsung keyboard options. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ Language and input. icon next to Samsung keyboard. 2. Tap the • Portrait keypad types allows you to choose a keypad configuration (Qwerty [default] or 3x4 Keyboard). • Input languages sets the input language. Tap a language from the available list. The keyboard is updated to the selected language. • Predictive text enables predictive text entry mode. This must be enabled to gain access to the advanced settings. Touch and hold to access the advanced settings. • T9 Trace like using Swype, allows you to type words by swiping between on-screen keys. ry From this menu you can set Predictive Text settings. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ Language and input. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie • Voice input activates the Voice input feature. This is an experimental feature that uses Google’s networked speech recognition application. Predictive Text Settings ta • Handwriting enables the device to recognize on-screen handwriting and convert it to text. • Reset settings resets the keyboard settings back to their original configuration. • Auto capitalization automatically capitalizes the first letter of the first word in each sentence (standard English style). • Auto-punctuate automatically inserts a full stop in a sentence by tapping the space bar twice when using the on-screen QWERTY keyboard. • Character preview provides an automatic preview of the current character selection within the text string. This is helpful when multiple characters are available within one key. 2. Tap the 3. icon next to Samsung keyboard. Tap Predictive text. 4. Tap the Word completion field to enable word completion. Your phone will predict how to complete the word you have started. 5. Tap the Word completion point field to set how many letters should be entered before a prediction is made. • Key-tap sound enables auditory feedback when you tap an on-screen key. 7. Tap the Next word prediction field to enable word prediction for the next word. • Tutorial launches a brief on-screen tutorial covering the main concepts related to the Samsung keyboard. 8. Tap the Auto-append field to automatically add predictions to the word you are typing. on fid en • Key-tap vibration enables vibration feedback when you tap an on-screen key. 6. Tap the Spell correction field. This option corrects typographical errors by selecting from a list of possible words that reflect the characters of the keys you tapped as well as the characters of nearby keys. Changing Your Settings 141 ry 2. Tap one of the following Swype settings: • How to Swype: provides tips on how to learn to use Swype. • Personal dictionary: Allows you to setup and manage your own dictionary. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie 10. Tap the Regional correction field. This option sets the device to automatically correct mistyped words according to normal spelling for your region. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ Language and input ➔ Swype. ta 9. Tap the Auto-substitution field to automatically replace words that you are typing. This option will help for accidental misspellings. 11. Tap the Recapture field. This option sets the device to re-display the word suggestion list when you select the wrong word from the list. • Preferences: Allows you to view and modify the following Swype options: – Vibrate on keypress: check this field to have the phone 12. To add a new word to the Predictive text dictionary: Tap the My word list field, then tap . Enter the new word, then tap Done to save. – Show tips: When enabled, the device displays helpful tips. – Auto-spacing: When enabled, inserts spaces automatically 13. To add words to substitute (for example youve becomes you’ve) tap Auto substitution list. – Auto-capitalization: When enabled, automatically capitalizes Swype Keypad Settings 142 on To configure Swype settings: fid en 14. A list of substitutions is displayed. If you don’t see the substitution you want, tap , and then input the Shortcut word and Substitution word. Then tap Done to save. vibrate each time you touch a key on the keyboard. when you pause entering text. the first letter of the first word in a sentence. – Show complete trace: When enabled, briefly display the Swype trace. – Word suggestion: When enabled, suggests possible matching words as you enter text. – Speed vs. accuracy: Send the sensitivity of Swype text recognition. – Version: View the current Swype software version. Language Options: Allows you to set the language that you will be using. 4. Tap next to the preferred TTS engine configure the following settings: • Language: allows you to set the language for spoken text. • Settings for Google Text-to-speech Engine: allows you to view Open Source Licenses. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Speech Settings 3. Tap Text-to-speech output and select Google Text-tospeech Engine or Samsung TTS. ry added and loads the default dictionary. ta – Reset Swype’s dictionary: Deletes all of the words you have This menu allows you to set the speech settings for Voice input. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ Language and input ➔ Voice. 2. Tap Voice search to configure the following: • Language: Choose a language for your voice input. • Speech output: Sets whether you will use speech output always or only when using hands-free. fid en • Block offensive words: Enable or disable blocking of recognized offensive words from the results of your voice-input Google searches. • Hotword detection: Enable to being able to launch voice search by saying the word “Google”. on • Download offline speech recognition: Enables voice input while offline. • Install voice data: allows you to install voice data for speech synthesis. 5. From the Text-to speech output screen, scroll down to access the following options: • Speech rate: Set the speed at which the text is spoken. • Listen to an example: Play a sample of speech synthesis (available if voice data is installed). 6. Tap the ON/OFF icon ON next to Driving mode to turn it on and enable incoming calls and notifications to be read out automatically. Pointer speed This option sets your Pointer speed. 1. From the Home screen, tap Language and input. ➔ Settings ➔ Changing Your Settings 143 2. Tap Pointer speed then drag the slider to the right to go faster or to the left to go slower. ry 3. Tap OK to save your setting. 5. Tap Sync settings, select which device parameters will be synched, and tap Sync now. Choose from: Sync Calendar, Sync Contacts, Sync Internet, and Sync S Note. 6. Tap Device backup and restore and configure your Backup and restore option. • Auto backup: configures automatic data backup to your cloud storage location. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie This feature allows you to use your external cloud storage solution to both synchronize your device to your Samsung account and then backup that local content to the cloud. ta Cloud Your device comes with a built-in Cloud storage solution known as Dropbox. Important! This feature requires an active Wi-Fi connection prior to use. 1. Log into your Samsung account and verify it is active. For more information, refer to “Creating a Samsung Account” on page 21. 3. From the Home screen, tap fid en 2. Log into an external cloud storage solution. This will be an application that you will have to download from another source such as the web or Play Store. ➔ Settings ➔ Cloud. 144 on 4. Confirm your Samsung account appears at the top of the screen. • Backup options: allows you to select what data is backed up from your device to the cloud. Choose from: Logs, Messages (SMS), Messages (MMS), and Wallpaper. Tap OK to complete the selection. • Back up now: manually loads up the currently selected categories and backs up the data to your cloud storage location. Tap Back up to begin the manual backup process. • Restore: allows you to retrieve your previously backed up data from your Samsung account and then download it to your device. Automatic Restore Back Up My Data 2. Tap Automatic restore to enable or disable automatic restoration of settings from the Google server. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie By setting this option, the Google server will back up all of your settings and data. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ Backup and reset. By setting this option, when you reinstall an application, all of your backed up settings and data will be restored. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ More settings (System) ➔ Backup and reset. ry The Back up and reset settings allow you to back up your data, back up accounts, automatically restore your phone, and reset your phone settings to the factory settings. ta Back up and reset 2. Tap Back up my data to enable or disable back up of application data, WI-Fi passwords, and other settings to the Google server. Factory Data Reset From this menu you can reset your phone and sound settings to the factory default settings. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ More settings (System) ➔ Backup and reset. 2. Tap Factory data reset. Backup Account fid en If you have enabled the Back up my data option, then the Backup account option is available. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ More settings (System) ➔ Backup and reset. The Factory data reset screen displays reset information. 3. Tap Reset device, then follow the prompts to perform the reset. on 2. Tap Backup account and tap your Google Gmail account or tap Add account to set your Google Gmail account to be backed up to the Google server. Changing Your Settings 145 Add Account This menu allows you to set up, manage, and synchronize accounts, including your Google and email accounts. Adding an Account 1. From a Home screen, tap account. ➔ Settings ➔ Add 2. Tap one of the account types. fid en 3. Use the keyboard and follow the prompts to enter your credentials and set up the account. on A green circle will appear next to the account type once you have created an account. Your email account will also be displayed in the Accounts section of the main Settings menu. 146 Removing an Account ta ry Important! Removing an account also deletes all of its messages, contacts, and other data from the device. 1. From a Home screen, tap tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Warning! Performing a Factory data reset will erase all data from your phone and internal SD card, including your Google account, system and application data and settings, and downloaded applications. It will not erase current system software, bundled applications, and external SD card files such as music and photos. ➔ Settings. 2. Tap the account which is located in the Accounts section. 3. Tap the account name. 4. Tap Remove account, then tap Remove account at the prompt to remove the account and delete all its messages, contacts, and other data. Synchronizing Accounts Select the items you want to synchronize on your account such as Books, Calendar, Contacts, and more. 1. From a Home screen, tap ➔ Settings. 2. Tap the account which is located in the Accounts section. 3. Tap the account name. Motion 2. Tap the ON/OFF icon screen to activate Motion. ON tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie The Motion settings allow you to set up various Motion activation services. For more information on using gestures, see “Using Gestures” on page 35. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ Motion. • Tilt to zoom: Once enabled, you must be on a screen where content can be zoomed. In a single motion, touch and hold two points on the display then tilt the tilt the device back and forth to zoom in or out. ry 5. Tap Settings to access your account settings. • Double tap to top: Once enabled, double tap the top of the device to be taken to the top of the current on-screen list. ta 4. Tap Sync now to synchronize your account or tap Sync all to synchronize all your accounts. Tap Cancel sync to stop the synchronization. at the top of your 3. The following options are available. Tap an option to activate the feature. A checkmark is displayed. • Quick glance: Once enable, you can check key information at a glance by reaching towards your device. fid en • Direct call: Once enabled, the device will dial the currently displayed on-screen Contact entry as soon as you place the device to your ear. on • Smart alert: Once enabled, pickup the device to be alerted and notified of you have missed any calls or messages. • Pan to move icon: Once enabled, touch and hold a desired application shortcut icon or widget on the screen. Once it detaches, move the device left or right to migrate it to a new location. • Pan to browse images: Once enabled, touch and hold a desired on-screen image to pan around it. Move the device left or right to pan vertically or up and down to pan horizontally around the large on-screen image. • Shake to update: Once enabled, shake your device to rescan for Bluetooth devices, rescan for Wi-Fi devices, Refresh a Web page, etc. • Turn over to mute/pause: Once enabled, mute incoming calls and any playing sounds by turning the device display down on a surface. This is the opposite of the Pickup to be Notified Gesture. Changing Your Settings 147 • Battery saving: disables the pen detection feature while the pen is attached to save battery power. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie • Palm swipe to capture: Once enabled, you can capture any on-screen information swiping across the screen. In a single motion, press the side of your hand on the screen and swipe form left to right. The image is then copied to the clipboard. • Pen attach/detach sound: allows you to select a sound to be played whenever the pen is attached or detached. ry • Learn about motions: provides additional help on using the different motions. • Dominant hand: allows you to set your phone to Left handed or Right handed. ta • Advanced settings: allows you to access additional settings for Quick glance, Gyroscope calibration, Tilt to zoom, Pan to move icon, and Pan to browse images. • Palm touch to mute/pause: Once enabled, you can pause any on-screen video or mute any current sound by simply covering the screen with your hand. Once you remove your hand from the screen, the device goes back to normal by either continuing to play the current video or unmuting the current sound. S Pen Settings fid en • Learn about hand motions: provides additional help on the hand motions such as Palm swipe to capture and Palm touch to mute/pause. on This menu allows you to customize settings for the S Pen. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ S Pen. 2. The following options are available: 148 • Open Quick Note: automatically opens Quick Note whenever the pen is detached. • Air view: When the S pen tip is near the screen for a while, the S pen hovering feature will be provided. • Quick command settings: allows you to create pen gestures to open selected apps or perform tasks. • Missing pen alert: sounds an alert and displays a pop-up when you move the device without attaching the pen. • S Pen help: provides additional information about S Pen. Accessory Settings This menu allows you to select the Audio output mode when using a car or desk dock. 1. From the Home screen, tap Accessory. ➔ Settings ➔ 7. Optional: Tap Use 24-hour format. If this is not selected the phone automatically uses a 12-hour format. 8. Tap Select date format and tap the date format type. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie 4. Tap Audio output to set your Audio output to Stereo or Surround. 6. Tap Select time zone, then tap a time zone. ry 3. Tap Audio output mode to use the external dock speakers when the phone is docked. 5. Tap Set time and tap the up and down arrows to set the Hour, Minute, and PM/AM, then tap Set. ta 2. Tap Dock sound to play sounds when inserting or removing the phone from the dock. Date and time Accessibility This menu allows you to change the current time and date displayed. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ Date and time. 2. Tap Automatic date and time to allow the network to set the date and time. 3. Tap Automatic time zone to allow the network to set the time zone. fid en Important! Deactivate Automatic date and time to manually set the rest of the options. on 4. Tap Set date and tap the up and down arrows to set the Month, Day, and Year then tap Set. Accessibility services are special features to make using the device easier for those with certain physical disabilities. Use the Accessibility settings to activate these services. Note: You can download accessibility applications from Play Store and manage their use here. 1. From the Home screen, tap Accessibility. ➔ Settings ➔ 2. Tap the Auto-rotate screen to automatically rotate the screen from landscape to portrait when you rotate your phone. 3. Tap the Screen timeout option to timeout the accessibility feature after a defined amount of time. Changing Your Settings 149 10. Tap the Text-to-speech output field to adjust your textto-speech settings. For more information, refer to “Speech Settings” on page 143. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie 6. Tap the Accessibility shortcut option to allow the accessibility shortcut under the device options to be used by pressing and holding the power key. ry 5. Tap the Call answering/ending option to be able to accept incoming calls by pressing the home key or end calls using the power key. 9. Tap the Negative colors field to reverse the display of on-screen colors from White text on a Black background to Black text on a White background. ta 4. Tap the Speak passwords option to activate this feature which reads out password information. 7. Tap the TalkBack option to activate the TalkBack feature. 11. Tap Enhance Web accessibility if want to allow apps to install scripts from Google that make their Web content more accessible. Tap Allow. 12. Tap the Sound balance field and use the slider to set the Left and Right balance when using a stereo device. 13. Tap the Mono audio field to enable stereo audio to be compressed into a single mono audio stream for use with a single earbud/earphone. Important! TalkBack can collect all of the text you enter, except passwords, including personal data and credit card numbers. It may also log your user interface interactions with the device. 14. Tap the Turn off all sounds field to mute every sound made by the device during taps, selections, notifications, etc. fid en Note: TalkBack, when installed and enabled, speaks feedback to help blind and low-vision users. 150 on 8. Tap the Font size field to change the size of the fonts used on the device within menus, options, etc. Choose from: Tiny, Small, Normal, Large, or Huge. 15. Tap the Press and hold delay field to select a time interval for this action. Choose from: Short, Medium, or Long. 1. From the Home screen, tap Developer options. • Show touches: Displays touch interactions on the screen. • Show pointer location: Highlights the data that was touched on the screen. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Warning! The developer options are intended for development use only. They can cause errors to occur on your device and with the applications you have on it. • Wait for debugger: specified apps must have debugger attached before executing. ry Use the Developer options to set options for application development. • Select app to be debugged: allows developers to select a specific app to debug. ta Developer options ➔ Settings ➔ 2. The following options are available: • Desktop backup password: allows you to protect your desktop with a backup password ID. • Show layout boundaries: displays clip bounds, margins, etc. • Show GPU view updates: flashes views inside windows when drawn with GPU. • Show screen updates: Areas of the screen flash when they update. • Stay away: with the Stay away option enabled, your screen will never sleep while you are charging the phone. • Window animation scale: Configure the scale for animation (ranges from off to 10x). • Protect SD card: requires apps to ask your permission before accessing data on your SD card. • Transition animation scale: Configure the scale for transitioning when using animation (ranges from off to 10x). • Animator duration scale: Configure the scale for duration when using animation (ranges from off to 10x). • Allow mock locations: used by developers when developing location-based applications. • Disable hardware overlays: Assigns the work of redendering to the GPU. on fid en • USB debugging: allows debugging when the device is attached to a PC by a USB cable. Changing Your Settings 151 • Force GPU rendering: allows the use of 2D hardware accelerations in applications. 1. From the Home screen, tap device. • Strict mode: Makes the screen flash when applications perform long operations on the main thread. 2. The following information displays: • Software update: allows you to update your phone software, if available. For more information, refer to “Software Update” on page 153. • Enable traces: Enables/disables on-screen tracing based on an available parameter. • Do not keep activities: destroys every activity as soon as the application is closed. • Limit background processes: sets the number of processes that can run in the background. • Show all ANRs: displays a prompt when applications running in the background are not responding. About Device on To access phone information: fid en This menu contains legal information, system tutorial information, and other phone information such as the model number, firmware version, baseband version, kernal version, and software build number. 152 ry tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie • Profile GPU rendering: Uses a 2D acceleration in applications. ta • Show CPU usage: Screen highlights the current CPU usage. ➔ Settings ➔ About • Status: displays the battery status, the level of the battery (percentage), network, signal strength, mobile network type, service state, roaming status, mobile network state, the phone number for this device, ERI version, IMEI number, IMEISV, IP address, Wi-Fi MAC address, Bluetooth address, Serial number, Up time, and Device status. • Legal information: This option displays information about Open source licenses as well as Google legal information. This information clearly provides copyright and distribution legal information and facts as well as Google Terms of Service, Terms of Service for Android-powered Phones, and much more pertinent information as a reference. Read the information and terms, then press to return to the Settings menu. • Model number: displays the phone’s model number. 5. When updating software, once the update file is downloaded, you can delay the update on the start screen by postponing it for a certain period of time. If you want to resume the update before the selected time, tap Continue update. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie • Kernel version: displays the kernel version loaded on this handset. ry • Baseband version: displays the baseband version loaded on this handset. 3. At the Software update prompt, tap OK to continue. 4. The phone automatically updates the software (if available), otherwise, when the Current software is up to date prompt is displayed, tap OK. ta • Android version: displays the android version loaded on this handset. • Build number: displays the software, build number. Note: Baseband, kernal and build numbers are usually used for updates to the handset or support. For additional information please contact your AT&T service representative. Software Update on fid en The AT&T Software Update feature enables you to use your phone to connect to the network and upload any new phone software directly to your phone. The phone automatically updates with the latest available software when you access this option. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ About device ➔ Software update. 2. Tap Check for updates. Changing Your Settings 153 Section 9: Connections The Browser is your access to the mobile web. This section explains how to navigate the Browser and introduces you to the basic features. Accessing the Mobile Web zoom in or out. • Pinching: Sweep in opposite directions at the same time to zoom From the Home screen, tap Internet The AT&T/YAHOO! mobile homepage displays. 1. To select an item, tap an entry. fid en 2. To scroll through a website, sweep the screen with your finger in an up or down motion. 3. Sweep the screen left to right to move laterally across a web page. on 4. To return to a previous page, press 5. To move forward to a web page, press in or out (use a pinching-in or pinching-out motion). Browser Options Navigating with the Browser 154 ry • Double tap: Quickly tap the screen twice on the web page to To access the Browser: 䡲 There are several ways to Zoom in and out on your browser. After tapping on a link or article, use one of these methods: • Tilting: Tap and hold the screen at two points then tilt the device back and forth to reduce or enlarge the screen. You must first enable motion in the Settings section. For more information, refer to “Power Saving” on page 132. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Internet Zooming in and out of the Browser ta This section describes the various connections your phone can make including accessing the Internet with your Browser, Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, and Connecting your PC. 1. From the home page, press to access the following options: • New window: displays a new window so you can browse multiple URLs. For more information, refer to “Adding and Deleting Windows” on page 155. • Add bookmark: allows you to add a URL to your bookmark list • Find on page: allows you to search in the current page. • Save for offline reading: allows you to store the current page in memory so that it can be read later even if you loose your Internet connection. • Downloads: displays the download history. • Print: allows you to print the screen or web page on a Samsung printer using Wi-Fi. fid en • Settings: allows you to modify your web settings. For more information, refer to “Browser Settings” on page 158. Enter a URL You can access a website quickly by entering the URL. Websites are optimized for viewing on your phone. To enter a URL and go to a particular website, follow these steps: on The website displays. Search the Internet To perform an internet search using keywords, follow these steps: 1. From the Google homepage, tap the URL field. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie • Desktop view: allows you to assign the browser to display the current page in the desktop view (to closely mimic the display as it would appear on a desktop computer). 2. Enter the URL using the on-screen keypad. ry • Share page: allows you to share the page using Gmail or as a message. 1. Tap the URL field at the top of your screen. ta • Add shortcut to home screen: allows you to add a shortcut to your Home screen. 2. Enter the keyword(s) to search using the on-screen keypad and tap Go. 3. Tap a link to view the website. Adding and Deleting Windows You can have up to eight Internet windows open at one time. To add a new window, follow these steps: ➔ New window. 1. From your browser, press A new browser window is opened. 2. Tap 2 (Windows) to see thumbnails of all open windows. 3. Tap a window listing to open up that Internet window. 4. Tap at the top right corner of the web page thumbnail to delete the window. Connections 155 Note: Any downloaded files will be preserved and will stay on your device after you exit the incognito mode. To add a new incognito window: 1. From your browser window, tap (Incognito). (Windows) ➔ Note: The incognito icon appears in the upper-left of the new browser window while you are in this mode. fid en (Windows) ➔ on 2. Scroll across the available windows and locate the incognito window. 156 ry While navigating a website, you can bookmark a site to quickly and easily access it at a future time. The URLs (website addresses) of the bookmarked sites are displayed in the Bookmarks page. From the Bookmarks page you can also view your Most visited websites and view your History. (Bookmarks). 1. From the Home webpage, tap The Bookmarks page is displayed. 2. A new browser window displays. To exit from the incognito window: 1. From your browser window, tap (New window). Using Bookmarks tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie The incognito feature allows you to view Internet sites outside of the normal browsing. Pages viewed in this incognito window won’t appear within your browser history or search history, and no traces (such as cookies) are left on your device. next to the incognito listing to delete this 3. Tap window. ta Going Incognito to display the following options: 2. Press • List/Thumbnail view: Select Thumbnail view (default) to view a thumbnail of the webpage with the name listed, or select List view to view a list of the bookmarks with Name and URL listed. • Create folder: Creates a new folder in which to store new bookmarks. • Change order: Rearranges the current bookmarks. • Move to folder: Selected bookmarks are moved to a selected folder. • Delete: Erases selected bookmarks. • Add shortcut to home: Adds a shortcut to the bookmarked webpage to your phone’s Home screen. • Share link: Allows you to share a URL address using many different options. • Copy link URL: Allows you to copy the URL address to use in a message. • Delete bookmark: Allows you to delete a bookmark. For more information, refer to “Deleting Bookmarks” on page 157. Adding Bookmarks 1. From any webpage, tap fid en • Set as homepage: Sets the bookmark to your new homepage. ➔ on 2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the Name, Address, and the Folder. 3. Tap Save. 1. From the Bookmarks page, tap and hold the bookmark you want to edit. 2. Tap Edit bookmark. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie • Edit bookmark: Allows you to edit the name or URL of the bookmark. For more information, refer to “Editing Bookmarks” on page 157. Editing Bookmarks ry • Open in new window: Opens the webpage in a new window. 4. Saved to bookmarks will appear at the bottom of the page. ta 3. Tap a bookmark to view the webpage, or touch and hold a bookmark for the following options: • Open: Opens the webpage of the selected bookmark. 3. Use the on-screen keypad to edit the Name, Address, and the Folder. 4. Tap Save. Deleting Bookmarks 1. From the Bookmarks page, tap and hold the bookmark you want to delete. 2. Tap Delete bookmark. 3. At the Delete confirmation window, tap OK. Emptying the Cookies A cookie is a small file which is placed on your phone by a website during navigation. In addition to containing some site-specific information, it can also contain some personal information (such as a username and password) which can pose a security risk if not properly managed. You can clear these cookies from your phone at any time. Connections 157 Using your History tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie A list of your most recently visited websites is displayed with Name and URL address. 2. Tap on a category such as Today, Last 7 days, or Most visited. 3. Tap any entry to display the webpage. Press ➔ Clear history to delete the History list. fid en Saved Pages on The Saved pages list provides you with a list of the websites that you have saved. ➔ Saved pages tab. 1. From the Home webpage, tap 158 2. Tap any entry to display the webpage. Browser Settings The History list provides you with a list of the most recently visited websites. These entries can be used to return to previously unmarked web pages. ➔ History tab. 1. From the Home webpage, tap 4. ry 2. At the Clear prompt, tap OK to delete the cookies or tap Cancel to exit. A list of your saved webpages is displayed with Name and URL address. The webpages that have been visited the most will appear at the top. ta ➔ Settings ➔ 1. From the Home webpage, press Privacy and security ➔ Clear all cookie data. To make adjustments in your browser settings, follow these steps: 1. Tap Internet ➔ ➔ Settings. 2. The following options are available: General • Set home page: Sets the current home page for the Web browser. • Form auto-fill: allows you to fill in web forms with a single tap. • Auto-fill text: allows you to enter text to be used in the Form auto-fill feature. Privacy and security • Clear cache: Deletes all currently cached data. Tap OK to complete the process. • Clear history: Clears the browser navigation history. Tap OK to complete the process. • Accept cookies: Allows sites, that require cookies, to save and read cookies from your device. • Clear notifications: Deletes website notification access information. Accessibility ry • Show security warnings: Notifies you if there is a security issue with the current website. • Force zoom: allows you to override the website’s request to control zoom. • Remember form data: Allows the device to store data from any previously filled out forms. Remove the checkmark to disable this function. • Text size: allows you to preview the text size, scale the text size using a slider bar, set the zoom amount on double tap, and minimize the font size using a slider bar. • Clear form data: Deletes any stored data from previously filled out forms. Tap OK to complete the process. • Inverted screen rendering: allows you to preview a website page, select Inverted rendering (black becomes white and vice versa), and adjust the Contrast using a slider bar. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie ta • Clear all cookie data: Deletes all current browser cookie files. • Enable location: Allows websites to request access to your location. • Clear location access: Clears location access for all websites. Tap OK to complete the process. • Remember passwords: Stores usernames and passwords for visited sites. Remove the checkmark to disable this function. fid en • Clear passwords: Deletes any previously stored usernames or passwords. Tap OK to complete the process. on • Enable notifications: Allows website notifications. Select Always on, On demand, or Off. Advanced • Select search engine: allows you to set your default search engine to Google, Yahoo!, or Bing. • Open in background: New pages are launched in a separate page and displayed behind the current one. Remove the checkmark to disable this function. • Enable JavaScript: Enables Javascript for the current Web page. Without this feature, some pages may not display properly. Remove the checkmark to disable this function. Connections 159 • Allow multiple tabs per app: Allows you to use multiple navigation tabs per application. Bandwidth management • Preload search results: Allows the browser to preload high confidence search results in the background to help speed up searches. • Default storage: Allows you to set your default storage to Phone or Memory Card. • Page preloading: Allows the browser to preload pages in the background. • Website settings: View advanced settings for individual websites. • Load images: Allows web page images to be loaded along with the other text components of a loaded website. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie ta ry • Enable plug-ins: Allows the download of plug-ins such as Adobe Flash. • Default zoom: Adjusts the zoom feature. Set to Far, Medium, or Close. • Open pages in overview: Shows an overview of newly opened web pages. • Auto-fit pages: Allows web pages to be resized to fit as much of the screen as possible. fid en • Block pop-ups: Prevents popup advertisement or windows from appearing onscreen. Remove the checkmark to disable this function. • Text encoding: Adjusts the current text encoding. 160 on • Reset to default: Clears all browser data and resets all settings to default. Labs • Quick controls: allows you to open quick controls and hide the app and URL bars by swiping your thumb from the left or right edge of the screen. • Full screen: allows you to access Full screen mode and hide the status bar. Wi-Fi About Wi-Fi Wi-Fi (short for "wireless fidelity"and sometimes referred to as wifi) is a term used for certain types of Wireless Local Area Networks (WLAN). These device types use an 802.11 wireless specification to transmit and receive wireless data. Wi-Fi communication requires access to an existing and 2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Wi-Fi field, to turn Wi-Fi ON ON . Connect to a Wi-Fi Network 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ Wi-Fi. The network names and security settings (Open network or Secured with WEP) of detected Wi-Fi networks are displayed in the Wi-Fi networks section. fid en 2. Tap the network you want to connect to. Note: When you select an open network, you will be automatically connected to the network. on Tap Add network. 2. Enter the Network SSID. This is the name of your Wireless Access Point. 3. Tap the Security field and select a security option. This must match the current security setting on your target WAP. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie By default, your device’s Wi-Fi feature is turned off. Turning Wi-Fi on makes your device able to discover and connect to compatible in-range WAPs. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings. 1. ry Turning Wi-Fi On Manually add your new network connection ta accessible Wireless Access Point (WAP). These WAPs can either be Open (unsecured) as within most Hot Spots, or Secured (requiring knowledge of the Router name and password). 4. If secured, you will also need to enter your WAP’s password. 5. Tap Save to store the new information and connect to your target WAP. Note: The next time your device connects to a previously accessed or secured wireless network, you are not prompted to enter the WAP key again, unless you reset your device back to its factory default settings. Turning Wi-Fi Off 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings. 2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Wi-Fi field, to turn Wi-Fi OFF OFF 3. Enter a wireless password if necessary. Connections 161 ➔ Settings ➔ Wi-Fi. 2. Tap Scan. All available Wi-Fi networks are displayed. Wi-Fi Status Indicators The following icons show your Wi-Fi connection status at a glance: Displays when Wi-Fi is connected, active, and communicating with a Wireless Access Point (WAP). fid en Displays when Wi-Fi is active but there is a communication issue with the target Wireless Access Point (WAP). on Displays when connected to another device using Wi-Fi Direct. For more information, refer to “Wi-Fi Direct” on page 162. 162 • Setting your Wi-Fi sleep policy • Checking for Wi-Fi Internet service • Automatically connecting to an AT&T Wi-Fi hotspot when detected • Specifying your Wi-Fi frequency band • Viewing your device’s MAC and IP Address tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie 1. From the Home screen, tap The Advanced Wi-Fi menu allows you to set up many of your device’s Wi-Fi service, including: • Network notification when an open network is available ry Manually Scan for a Wi-Fi Network Wi-Fi Advanced Settings ta Note: Use of wireless data connections such as Wi-Fi and Bluetooth can cause an added drain to your battery and reduce your use times. To access the Advanced Wi-Fi menu: 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ Wi-Fi. 2. Tap Advanced. For more information, refer to “Advanced Wi-Fi Settings” on page 119. Wi-Fi Direct Wi-Fi Direct allows device-to-device connections so you can transfer large amounts of data over a Wi-Fi connection. Note: See your service plan for applicable charges for Wi-Fi Direct. 3. At the bottom of the Wi-Fi screen, tap the Wi-Fi Direct button. To share Videos, Photos, or other information with the connected device, follow these steps: 1. View the information that you want to share. For example, if you want to share a photo, find the photo in your camera viewer or My Files folder, then tap the Share, Share via, or Send via option. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie 4. Repeat steps 1 - 3 on the other device you want to connect with. The steps on a different model of phone, may be different. Sharing Information with Connected Device ry ➔ Settings ➔ Wi-Fi. ta 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Wi-Fi field, to turn Wi-Fi ON ON . 5. On your phone, tap Scan. The device scans for other Wi-Fi Direct devices. 6. Once the device you want to connect to is displayed, tap on it. 7. The other device has 2 minutes to tap Accept for the connection to be made. fid en 8. Once connected, the other device will show as Connected in your list of Wi-Fi Direct devices and the icon will display at the top of your screen. 9. To change your Device name, press name. ➔ Device 2. Tap the Wi-Fi Direct option. 3. Tap the connected device name. For example, Android_49ba. 4. The other device will receive a prompt to receive the information and must tap Accept. 5. The file is transferred and the other device will receive a screen notification that a Wi-Fi file has been received. The file can be found in My files ➔ SD card in the ShareViaWifi folder. Note: Depending on the other device model, the prompts and shared folder information may differ. on 10. For additional information about Wi-Fi Direct, press ➔ Help. Connections 163 Note: The first time you use the AT&T Smart Wi-Fi, you will need to download the application from the Market. For more information, refer to “Play Store” on page 194. ry NFC NFC (Near Field Communication) allows data exchange when you touch your device with another compatible device. This is used for applications such as S Beam. To activate NFC on your device, see “NFC” on page 125. S Beam 2. At the Install screen, tap Ok. 3. Sign on to your Google account if you have not already done so. For more information, refer to “Creating a New Google Account” on page 13. fid en 4. Follow the on-screen instructions to download the updated application from the Play Store. 5. Read the License Agreement and tap Accept to continue. on 6. At the Welcome screen, tap OK. 164 8. Follow the onscreen instructions to use AT&T Wi-Fi. For more information on how to use this application, go to www.att.com/smartwifi. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie With AT&T Smart Wi-Fi, you can maximize your battery performance, maximize your data, simplify access to AT&T Hot Spots and Wi-Fi networks, automate your Wi-Fi connections, and track your data use. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ AT&T Smart Wi-Fi 7. At the Initial Setting screen, tap Yes if you want AT&T Smart Wi-Fi to automatically connect to any hotspot that is available for public use. Otherwise, tap No. ta AT&T Smart Wi-Fi When S Beam is activated, you can beam files to another NFC-capable device by holding the devices close together. You can beam images and videos from your Gallery, music files from your Music Player, and more. For more information, refer to “S Beam” on page 126. Bluetooth About Bluetooth Bluetooth is a short-range communications technology that allows you to connect wirelessly to a number of Bluetooth devices, such as headsets and hands-free car kits, and Turning Bluetooth On and Off ➔ Settings. 2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Bluetooth field, to turn Bluetooth ON ON . When active, appears within the Status area. To turn Bluetooth off: 1. From the Home screen, tap ta Bluetooth Settings The Bluetooth settings menu allows you to set up many of the characteristics of your device’s Bluetooth service, including: • Entering or changing the name your device uses for Bluetooth communication and description tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie To turn Bluetooth on: 1. From the Home screen, tap Displays briefly when Bluetooth is on but is not connected to a Bluetooth device. ry Bluetooth-enabled handhelds, computers, printers, and wireless devices. The Bluetooth communication range is usually up to approximately 30 feet. • Setting your device’s visibility (or “discoverability”) for other ➔ Settings. 2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Bluetooth field, to turn Bluetooth OFF OFF Bluetooth Status Indicators fid en The following icons show your Bluetooth connection status at a glance: Displays when Bluetooth is active. on Displays when Bluetooth is connected (paired) and communicating. Bluetooth devices • Displaying your device’s Bluetooth address To access the Bluetooth Settings menu: 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings. 2. Verify your Bluetooth is ON ON 3. Tap Bluetooth. To change your Bluetooth name: 1. From the Bluetooth settings page, press name. ➔ Device 2. Enter a new name. 3. Tap OK to complete the rename process. Connections 165 To show received files: 䡲 From the Bluetooth settings page, press received files. ➔ Show A list of all files received from Bluetooth is displayed. To scan for Bluetooth devices: 1. Verify your Bluetooth is active. on fid en 2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap Scan to search for visible external Bluetooth-compatible devices such as headsets, devices, printers, and computers. 166 ry The Bluetooth pairing process allows you to establish trusted connections between your device and another Bluetooth device. When you pair devices, they share a passkey, allowing for fast, secure connections while bypassing the discovery and authentication process. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie 2. Select a time that you would like your device visibility to time-out. Pairing Bluetooth Devices ta To make your device visible: 1. From the Bluetooth settings page, press ➔ Visible time-out. • Making your device visible allows it to be detected by other devices for pairing and communication. To pair your device with another Bluetooth device: 1. Verify your Bluetooth is active. 2. Tap Scan. Your device will display a list of discovered in-range Bluetooth devices. 3. Tap a device from the list to initiate pairing. 4. Enter the passkey or PIN code, if needed, and tap OK. 5. The external device will then have to also accept the connection and enter your device’s PIN code. Once successfully paired to an external device, appears within the Status area. Note: Due to different specifications and features of other Bluetooth-compatible devices, display and operations may be different, and functions such as transfer or exchange may not be possible with all Bluetooth compatible devices. Disconnecting a paired device Disconnecting a paired device breaks the connection between the device and your phone, but retains the knowledge of the pairing. At a later point when you wish to reconnect the device, there is no need to setup the connection information again. 1. Verify your Bluetooth is active. 2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap the previously paired device (from the bottom of the page). 3. Tap OK to confirm disconnection. fid en Note: Disconnections are manually done but often occur automatically if the paired device goes out of range of your phone or it is powered off. on Deleting a paired device (unpair) ta ry Deleting a device from your list removes its “connection record” and upon reconnection would require that you reenter all the previous pairing information. 1. Verify your Bluetooth is active. 2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap next to the previously paired device. This opens the connected device’s menu options. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Note: Pairing between two Bluetooth devices is a one-time process. Once a pairing has been created, the devices will continue to recognize their partnership and exchange information without having to re-enter a passcode again. 3. Tap Unpair to delete the paired device. 4. Tap Rename to change the name of the paired device. 5. Tap Call audio to enable or disable call audio from the paired device. 6. Tap Media audio to enable or disable media audio from the paired device. Sending Contacts via Bluetooth Depending on your paired devices’ settings and capabilities, you may be able to send pictures, Contact information, or other items using a Bluetooth connection. Note: Prior to using this feature, Bluetooth must first be enabled, and the recipient’s device must be visible. Connections 167 . ➔ Import/Export ➔ Send namecard via. 5. Tap Done. 6. Tap Bluetooth. 7. Select the paired device to send the contacts to. Note: The external Bluetooth device must be visible and communicating for the pairing to be successful. 8. A Bluetooth share notification will appear in your notifications list. PC Connections fid en You can connect your device to a PC using your PC data cable using various USB connection modes. on Storage: allows you to use the onboard storage capacity of the phone to store and upload files. This option allows your computer to detect the phone as a removable storage drive. 168 Kies: allows you to manage music, movies and photos. You can also backup precious contacts and calendars, download apps and podcasts and automatically upgrade device firmware. Kies conveniently syncs your life across all your devices. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie 4. Tap each contact that you would like to send via Bluetooth. A green checkmark will appear next to each entry you select. Kies air: this application allows you to sync your Windows PC wirelessly with your phone provided they are both on the same Wi-Fi network. ry 3. Press ➔ Contacts ta 1. Verify your Bluetooth is active. 2. From the Home screen, tap Note: To sync your device to your PC, it is highly recommended that you install Samsung Kies which is available at http://www.samsung.com/kies (for Windows/ Mac). Note: If you are a Windows XP user, ensure that you have Windows XP Service Pack 3 or higher installed on your computer. Also, ensure that you have Samsung Kies 2.0 or Windows Media Player 10 or higher installed on your computer. ➔ 3. From the Kies air homescreen, tap Start. A web URL is displayed on your phone screen. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Note: The file directory of the memory card displays as a removable disk, separate from the internal memory. 2. On your phone, from the Home screen, tap Kies air ry You can connect your device to a PC as a removable disk and access the file directory. If you insert a memory card in the device, you can also access the files directory from the memory card by using the device as a memory card reader. 1. Sign onto the same Wi-Fi network from your phone and from your PC. ta Connecting as a Storage Device 1. Connect the USB cable to the device and connect the cable to the computer. After a few seconds, a pop-up window displays on the PC when connected. 2. On the PC pop-up, click Open device to view files. 3. Copy files from the PC to the memory card. Kies air fid en Kies air allows you to sync your Windows PC wirelessly with your phone provided they are both on the same Wi-Fi network. You can view and share call logs, videos, photos, music, bookmarks, ringtones, and even send SMS messages from your PC. on To use the Kies air, follow these steps: 4. From your PC, enter the URL in your web browser. 5. On your phone, an Access Request prompt is displayed. Tap Allow to continue. 6. Tap the Remember for today checkbox if you will be using Kies air with the same PC later. 7. From your PC, a security warning may be displayed asking if you want to run this application. Click Run to continue. 8. On your PC, the Kies air screen is displayed. On your phone, the icon appears at the top of your screen. 9. Follow the on-screen instructions to view and share information between your phone and PC. 10. To exit the Kies air application, tap Stop on your phone, then close out the web browser on your PC. Connections 169 170 on fid en ta tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie NFC (Near Field Communication) allows data exchange when you touch your device with another compatible device. This is used for applications such as S Beam. For information on NFC and NFC related features, see “NFC” on page 125. ry NFC Section 10: Applications fid en Tip: To open applications quickly, add the icons of frequentlyused applications to one of the Home screens. For details, see “Customizing Your Home Screen” on page 39. You can also add an application icon as a Primary Shortcut that will display on all Home screens. If you add an application as a primary shortcut, the application icon will not be displayed in the Apps menu. For more information, refer to “Adding and Removing Primary Shortcuts” on page 40. AllShare Play ta ry AllShare Play allows users to share their in-device media content with other external devices using DLNA certified™ (Digital Living Network Alliance) Devices. These external devices must also be DLNA-compliant. Wi-Fi capability can be provided to TVs via a digital multimedia streamer. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie This section contains a description of each application that is available in the Apps Menu, its function, and how to navigate through that particular application. If the application is already described in another section of this user manual, then a cross reference to that particular section is provided. on This application wirelessly synchronizes your Samsung device with your TV, streams content, and even keeps tabs on who calls or sends text messages with real-time, on-screen monitoring. Samsung’s AllShare makes staying connected easy. AllShare Definitions: AllShare This uses the traditional DLNA technology for sharing multimedia (photos, videos, or music) to your Samsung Smart TV and other DLNA devices. AllShare Play This new feature builds on the previous AllShare feature. It includes features such as Web storage integration and social networking integration. This is a Web service that requires using a Samsung account. Applications 171 ta ry Important! The Samsung account manages the access information (username/password) to several applications, such as AllShare Play, ChatON, and Media Hub. 1. From the Home screen, tap tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie AllShare Play/Group A subset feature of AllShare Play, this Cast allows you to mirror photos and multimedia presentations with other members of your current Wi-Fi group. Users must be on the same Wi-Fi and provide an access code to join the group. AllShare Cast (with This feature functions with an external Hub accessory) Wi-Fi AllShareCast Hub connected to a TV. It allows you to fully mirror what is currently displayed on your device to the external TV. 172 on fid en Important! You must first connect both of your communicating devices to the same Wi-Fi and be using an active/registered Samsung account prior to using this application. For more information, refer to “WiFi Settings” on page 119. For more information, refer to “Creating a Samsung Account” on page 12. ➔ AllShare Play The AllShare Play screen is displayed. 2. If prompted, read the on-screen message about network charges and tap OK to continue and return to the main AllShare Play screen. 3. Tap Start and follow the on-screen prompts. The application contains two separate streaming media options: • Registered Storage: allows you to receive and playback media stored externally (server, laptop, etc.) directly on your device by allowing you to add a Web storage service for streaming content. • Registered Devices: allows you to stream/share selected multimedia content from your device to DLNA compliant device connected to the same Wireless Access Point. ry • Language: allows you select a display language. • About: displays application information. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie The AllShare Play™ application must first be configured prior to its initial use. You must setup parameters such as connected Wi-Fi, Items to share, source server address, and external device acceptance rights. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ AllShare Play • Lock AllShare Play: allows you to restrict access to AllShare Play by requiring a user enter the currently active and associated Samsung account password. Tap Locking AllShare Play to activate/deactivate the feature. ta Configuring AllShare Settings 2. Press and then tap Settings and configure the following settings as desired: • Registered Storage: allows you to add a Web storage location. Without a storage service/location added, you will not be able to use AllShare Play. • Registered Devices: defaults to your phone. This indicates the source of the streaming images and videos. Use the main screen to add more external devices. fid en • Setting up web services: allows you to set up external Web services by signing in to external sites such as Facebook, Twitter, YouTube, etc. • Auto Upload photos from mobile: allows you to setup automatic upload of images from your device to those storage locations specified within the Web storage list. on • Video quality settings: allows you to setup the video quality for streamed video content. • Contact Us: allows you to contact the AllShare team via a new email from an available email account. Setting Up Web Storage SugarSync is a Web storage service that allows you to use up to 5GB of storage space to store your files and share them on the “Cloud”. Note: If you are using another Web storage service, log into that service first before using AllShare Play. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ AllShare Play (Add storage) and 2. From the main screen, select then tap on the media that you would like to share. 3. If this is your first time to use the service, set up a new account by tapping Sign up ➔ SugarSync Sign Up. Applications 173 1. Launch AllShare on the target device (such as an Internet TV, Samsung Tablet, etc.). 2. From the Home screen, tap ry Note: If you already have a current Sugar Sync account, tap Sign in. ➔ AllShare Play 3. Tap your device name from the Devices list. 5. Agree to the terms of service and tap Sign up or Go on your on-screen keyboard. 4. Tap an available category tab (Pictures, Music, Movies, Files, or Info) and select a file. • Touch and hold to select multiple files. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie ta 4. Enter in your Email address and your password. Important! After you enter your passwords, do not press to hide the keyboard. This action erases the password fields. 6. You can choose to download the SugerSync app or tap Skip to continue. 7. Once the process is successfully completed, the Web storage icon or name appears in the Web storage area of the main screen. fid en Sharing Media via AllShare Play to a Target Device 174 on Important! Make sure all communicating devices are connected to the same Wi-Fi. • A file with in the upper-left indicates it is stored remotely on a web storage location. Selecting this media causes your device to access the file currently stored on your services’ servers. 5. Tap an available on-screen file, image, or video to place a green check mark alongside it. 6. Tap 2 (Stream to connected devices) to begin streaming the selected files. 7. On a target device (ex: Internet TV) select the onscreen Allow button to continue. Note: At this stage your device is requesting access to share media with the external source. AllShare Play Screen Sharing via Group Cast 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Tap ➔ Note: The newly altered image (with markups and comments) can not be saved, but you can take a screen shot of the current image and save it to your Clipboard. For more information, refer to “Using Gestures” on page 35. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Important! Verify all of your recipients are connected to the same Wi-Fi. You can now interact and draw with the on-screen image, users will instantaneously see the same gestures and also be able to interact. ry Confirm (AllShare Controller enabled) appears in the Notification area at the top of the device to indicate you are using your device as the media source. ta 8. ➔ Gallery Group Cast. 3. If prompted, read the on-screen notification and tap OK to continue and return to the main AllShare Play screen. 4. Enter a security PIN and tap Done. This process makes sure only desired recipients can view your shared image. fid en 5. Re-enter you PIN and tap Done. The device then waits for other connected recipients to accept the connection and enter the PIN on their screens. – or – AT&T Code Scanner AT&T Code Scanner allows you to scan two-dimensional (QR and datamatrix codes) and one-dimensional (UPC and EAN) barcodes found in magazines, stores, and online. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ AT&T Code Scanner Note: The first time you use the AT&T Code Scanner, you will need to download the updated application from the Market. When the Market page displays, tap Update. For more information, refer to “Play Store” on page 194. on Tap Start Group Cast anyway to continue the process while your users connect. Applications 175 5. Enter your information in the My Profile section. 6. Tap ON to activate your profile. This allows the application to customize your results. For example, your zip code may help to deliver a coupon for a restaurant in your neighborhood. You can toggle the activation button between ON and OFF. 7. Tap Done. 8. Read the tutorial and tap Next until you are at the end of the tutorial. Tap Finish. fid en 9. Position your phone approximately 2-5 inches from the barcode. Ensure that the barcode is completely within the window. Keep your phone steady for best results. on 10. The scanner will automatically scan the barcode. It may take several seconds. 176 AT&T FamilyMap provides peace of mind by being able to conveniently locate a family member from your wireless phone or PC and know that your family's location information is secure and private. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ AT&T FamilyMap tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie 4. At the My Profile screen, tap OK to allow your location information to be used or tap Don’t Allow to bypass. AT&T FamilyMap ry 3. Read the Terms and Conditions and tap Accept to continue. 11. After the scan, tap Yes to open the web page to view the information on the barcode that was scanned. ta 2. Sign on to your Google account if you are not already signed on. For more information, refer to “Creating a New Google Account” on page 13. Note: The first time you use AT&T Family Map, you will need to download the application from the Market. For more information, refer to “Play Store” on page 194. 2. At the AT&T FamilyMap Sign In webpage, enter your Phone Number and Password in the appropriate fields and tap Submit. Note: To sign up for service, visit http://www.att.com/familymap for more information. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. AT&T Navigator ry AT&T Locker allows you to store, share, and sync all of your photos, videos, and documents in one safe, convenient place; the AT&T cloud. For more information, refer to “AT&T Locker” on page 85. The first time that you use AT&T Navigator, the necessary files will be downloaded. The AT&T Navigator main screen displays. 3. Tap an AT&T Navigator plan that you choose to purchase. ta AT&T Locker tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. AT&T Navigator provides you with access to real-time GPSdriven applications. These programs not only allow you to achieve turn-by-turn navigation, but also access local searches. Important! You must have a data plan to use this feature. Note: These services require the purchase of a subscription. fid en To launch the AT&T Navigator application, follow these steps: 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ AT&T Navigator AT&T Ready2Go AT&T Ready2Go allows you to quickly and easily setup your phone by using the web browser on your PC. You can set-up email accounts, import contacts, set wallpaper, configure WiFi and many more features. For more information, refer to “Setting up your Phone with Ready2Go” on page 12. AT&T Smart Wi-Fi With AT&T Smart Wi-Fi, you can maximize your battery performance, maximize your data, simplify access to AT&T Hot Spots and Wi-Fi networks, automate your Wi-Fi connections, and track your data use. For more information, refer to “AT&T Smart Wi-Fi” on page 164. on 2. Read the Terms of Service and tap Accept to acknowledge the terms of use. Applications 177 Calendar ry With the Calendar feature, you can consult the calendar by day, week, or month, create events, and set an alarm to act as a reminder, if necessary. To access the Calendar: 1. From the Home screen, tap tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie With this feature, you can use the phone as a calculator. The calculator provides the basic arithmetic functions; addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division. The Calculator also keeps a history of recent calculations. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Calculator ta Calculator 2. Enter the first number using the on-screen numeric keys. 3. Enter the operation for your calculation by tapping the corresponding on-screen arithmetic function key. • Month: displays the Month view. 4. Enter the second number. • Day: displays the Day view. 5. To view the result, tap equals (=). ➔ Clear on fid en 7. To clear the calculator history, press history. 178 • Week: displays the Week view. • Agenda: displays the Agenda view. located at the 6. To view calculator history, tap top of the calculator buttons. A history of your past again to display calculations is displayed. Tap the calculator keypad. 8. To change the text size, press Small, Medium, or Large. ➔ Calendar 2. Tap (Show More) to display these tabs: • Year: displays the Year view. ➔ Text size. Tap • Task: allows you to search for tasks. 3. Tap event. (Create event) to create a new Calendar 4. Tap Today to display the current date indicated by a blue box. 5. Tap Calendars to select the calendar options that you want displayed. 6. Press and select one of the following options: • Go to: displays a specific date. • Sync: allows you to synchronize your calendar with one or all of your accounts. This option only appears when an account has been opened. 9. Tap Handwriting settings and configure handwritingrelated calendar settings such as: First day of week and Show week number. • Settings: displays a list of configurable settings. 10. Tap Set alerts & notifications to adjust the event notification method. Choose from: Alert, Status bar notification, and Off. ta tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Calendar Settings 1. From any Calendar view, press ry • Search: allows you to search within your current events. 8. Tap Calendars and select the type of general synchronization settings you want. A check mark indicates selection. • Delete: allows you to delete All events, All events before today, or an individual event. ➔ Settings. 2. Tap Month view styles and select an option. 3. Tap Week view and select a type: Timeline or Analog. 4. Tap First day of week and select either Local default, Saturday, Sunday or Monday. 5. Tap Hide declined events to activate this option. A check mark indicates selection. fid en 6. Tap Lock time zone (to lock event time based on your current user-selected time zone). Select a time zone from within the Select time zone field. on 7. Tap Show week number to display the week numbers along the side of the week entries. 11. Tap Select ringtone to assign a ringtone to a calendar event notification. 12. Tap Vibration to set the Event notification tone to vibrate. 13. Tap Default reminder time to assign a default time frame for event reminders. 14. Tap Notifications while screen is off to display notifications on the full screen while it is turned off. 15. Tap Quick responses to select quick responses to emailing guests. 16. Tap Swipe with two fingers to change the way events are displayed when swiped. Applications 179 ChatON Clock The Clock application allows you to access alarms, view the World Clock, set a stopwatch, and use a timer. Alarm on fid en This feature allows you to set an alarm to ring at a specific time. ➔ 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Clock Alarm ➔ Create alarm . The following options display: • Time: tap (Up) or (Down) to set the new time for the alarm to sound. Tap AM or PM. 180 • Alarm type: sets the way in which the alarm sounds when activated (Melody, Vibration, Vibration and melody, and Briefing). tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie With the ChatON application, you can interact with friends and family with text, images, hand-written notes and video shared instantly. You can chat in groups, while a Web client will allow the easy sharing of content and conversations between your phone and PC. For more information, refer to “ChatON” on page 116. ry Use your 8.0 megapixel camera feature to produce photos in a JPEG format. Your phone also functions as a Camcorder to take videos. For more information, refer to “Camera” on page 95. • Alarm repeat: use this option to set the repeating status for the alarm by tapping one the days that you want the alarm to sound. Tap the Repeat weekly checkbox to have the alarm repeat weekly. ta Camera • Alarm volume: drag the slider to adjust the alarm’s volume. • Alarm tone: sets the sound file which is played when the alarm is activated. Select Sounds or Go to My files. • Snooze: use this option to set a Duration (3, 5, 10, 15, or 30 Minutes) and Snooze repeat (1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 Times). Tap the ON/OFF slider to activate. • Smart alarm: tracks body movements and calculates the best time for sounding the alarm. Place the phone somewhere on your bed then the phone's movement sensor (also known as accelerometer) is sensitive enough to work from any part of the bed. Set the Duration and the Tone. Tap the ON/OFF slider to activate. • Name: allows you to use a specific name for the alarm. The name will appear on the display when the alarm activates. 2. Tap Save to store the alarm details. World Clock To stop an alarm when it sounds, touch and sweep the icon to the right. Setting the Snooze Feature To activate the Snooze feature after an alarm sounds, touch and sweep the ZZ icon to the left. Snooze must first be set in the alarm settings. For more information, refer to “Alarm” on page 180. Deleting Alarms To delete an alarm, follow these steps: 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Clock Alarm ➔ ➔ Delete. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie 䡲 ➔ on fid en 2. Tap the alarm or alarms you wish to delete. A green checkmark will appear next to each selection. Tap Select all to delete all alarms. 3. Tap Done. World Clock allows you to view the time of day or night in other parts of the world. World Clock displays time in hundreds of different cities, within all 24 time zones around the world. ➔ 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Clock World clock. The clock for your time zone is displayed. ry 䡲 ta Turning Off an Alarm 2. Tap Add city to add another city to the World Clock. 3. Scroll through the list of cities to find the city you want to add, or tap the Search bar and use the keypad to enter a city to search for. 4. Tap the city you want to add. The clock for that city will display. 5. To set Daylight Savings time, press and hold a city, then tap DST settings. 6. Select Automatic, Off, 1 hour, or 2 hours. 7. If Daylight Savings Time is selected, the sun symbol on the World Clock listing will appear orange. Deleting a World Clock Entry 1. From the Home screen, tap World clock ➔ ➔ Delete. ➔ Clock Applications ➔ 181 4. Tap the Seconds field to set seconds. 5. Tap Start to begin the timer and tap Stop to pause the timer. 2. Tap Start to start the stopwatch and tap Lap to mark a unit of time per lap. 3. Tap Stop to stop the stopwatch. 4. Tap Restart to continue or tap Reset to erase all times recorded. Desk clock You can use the Desk clock when you have a desk dock and you want your phone to display the time, day, date, location, and weather conditions when it is docked. ➔ 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Clock Desk clock. The default Desk clock is displayed. Timer fid en You can use this option to set a countdown timer. Use a timer to count down to an event based on a preset time length (hours, minutes, and seconds). ➔ 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Clock Timer. 2. The Minutes field is highlighted and set to 1 minute. Use the keypad to set the number of minutes you want. on 3. Tap the Hours field to set hours if desired. As you tap different fields, they will become highlighted. 182 6. After stopping, tap Restart to continue or tap Reset to set the timer back to the original setting. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie You can use this option to measure intervals of time. ➔ 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Clock Stopwatch. ta Stopwatch ry 2. Tap the city clocks you wish to delete. 3. Tap Done. 2. Tap to display the Desk clock in full-screen mode. 3. To make changes, tap ➔ Settings. 4. The following options are displayed while in full-screen mode: • Hide status bar: when this is checked, the status bar is hidden from view. • Wallpaper: tap to select Desk clock wallpaper from Default, Gallery, or Same as home screen. Downloads The Downloads application allows you to manage all of your downloads from the Play Store and the Browser. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Downloads tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie • Brightness: sets your Desk clock brightness by dragging the slider bar to the desired level. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions for accessing helpful information. ry • AccuWeather: when this is checked, the location, temperature, and weather condition is displayed. Tap to uncheck. The AT&T Device Help screen is displayed. ta • Time/Calendar display: when this is checked, the time, day, and date is displayed. Tap to uncheck. • Dock: allows you to set your Dock settings such as Dock sound, Audio output mode, and Desk home screen display. Contacts You can manage your daily contacts by storing their name and number in your Address Book. Address Book entries can be sorted by name, entry, or group. All of your downloads are listed. 2. Tap the Internet downloads tab to see all of the downloads you have made from the Browser. 3. Tap the Other downloads tab to see all other downloads. 4. Tap Sort by size to see your downloads sorted in size order. For more information, refer to “Contacts and Your Address Book” on page 72. 5. Tap Sort by date to see your downloads sorted in time order. DeviceHelp fid en You can also synchronize your phone Address Book with AT&T Address Book, the network backup service. on DeviceHelp provides online information to help with your device questions. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ DeviceHelp Email Email enables you to review and create email using various email services. You can also receive text message alerts when you receive an important email. For more information, refer to “Using Email” on page 111. Applications 183 Gmail 2. Tap Get started, select some on-screen categories and tap Done to create a new profile. – or – Tap Sign In to log into your previously created profile. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. Gallery on fid en The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos. For photos, you can also perform basic editing tasks, view a slideshow, set photos as wallpaper or contact image, and share as a picture message. For more information, refer to “Gallery” on page 93. 184 ry Gmail is a web-based email service. Gmail is configured when you first set up your phone. Depending on your synchronization settings, Gmail can automatically synchronize with your Gmail account on the web. For more information, refer to “Using Gmail” on page 113. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie This application creates a personalized digital magazine out of everything being shared with you. Access news stories, personal feeds and other related material. Flip through your Facebook newsfeed, tweets from your Twitter account, photos from friends and much more. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Flipboard ta Flipboard Google The Google Search application is the same on-screen Internet search engine that is on the Google Search Bar on your main Home screen. For more information, refer to “Google Search Bar” on page 33. Google + Google+ makes messaging and sharing with your friends a lot easier. You can set up Circles of friends, visit the Stream to get updates from your Circles, use Messenger for fast messaging with everyone in your Circles, or use Instant Upload to automatically upload videos and photos to your own private album on Google+. For more information, refer to “Google +” on page 114. Latitude The Help application provides valuable information to help you with any questions you may have about your phone. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Help 2. Follow the on-screen instructions to receive information on your phone functions, settings, and applications. Internet 2. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Latitude Your location is displayed on the map, accurate to 40 meters. Sharing your Location with Friends fid en Open the web browser to start surfing the web. The browser is fully optimized and comes with advanced functionality to enhance the Internet browsing feature on your phone. For more information, refer to “Internet” on page 154. Kies air You must first set up your phone to use wireless networks to help pinpoint your location. Also, Latitude works best when Wi-Fi is enabled. 1. Log on to your Google account. For more information, refer to “Creating a New Google Account” on page 13. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Help With Google Latitude, you can see the location of all of your friends on a map or on a list. You can also share or hide your location. ry While you are viewing documents, photos, videos, and music, you can share them real-time with your friends. For more information, refer to “AllShare Play Screen Sharing via Group Cast” on page 175. ta Group Cast on Kies air allows you to sync your Windows PC wirelessly with your phone provided they are both on the same Wi-Fi network. For more information, refer to “Kies air” on page 169. 1. From the Latitude map screen, tap FRIENDS LIST to display your Latitude friends. At first, only your name is displayed. 2. Tap 3. Tap Select from Contacts or Add via email address. 4. Tap a contact or enter an email address and tap Add friends. 5. At the Send sharing requests prompt, tap Yes. Applications 185 6. To view the map, tap MAP VIEW. ry on the screen. ta – Display: allows you to display the Zoom Buttons and Scale Bar – Offline and cache: allows you to set options to pre-fetch map tiles when not using WiFi and to clear the cache that holds the map tiles. Background location reporting, Location history, Latitude location sharing, and Check-ins. – Labs: this is a testing ground for experimental features that • Make available offline: allows you to save a selected area to you My places folder where you can view it later. – What’s New: allows you to see the latest changes in Play Store fid en From the map display, press to display the following options: • Clear Map: allows you to remove all markings and layers from the map. • Search: allows you to search for a place of interest. on • Directions: displays navigation directions to a location from a starting point. 186 • Settings: the following Latitude options are available: – Location settings: allows you to manage the settings for your Latitude Options 䡲 • Layers: Layers are additional items that you can have displayed on your map. They include Traffic, Satellite, Terrain, Transit Lines, Latitude, My Maps, Bicycling, and Wikipedia. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Your friend will receive an email or text message with your location marked on a map. They will also receive instructions on how to view your location from the web or use Latitude on their phone or tablet provided it is available. Once they acknowledge your request, their location will display on your phone. They can share their location from their computer, phone, or tablet. For more information, go to http://www.google.com/latitude. aren’t ready for primetime. They may change, break or disappear at any time. Click on a Lab to enable or disable it. and update your app. – About: displays general information about Google maps such as Version, Platform, Locale, Total data sent, Total data received, Free memory, etc. – Feedback: allows you to send feedback to Google. • Help: displays the Google Mobile Help web page where you can receive help on Google Maps. Depending on your location, you can view basic, custom, and satellite maps and local business information, including locations, contact information, and driving directions. You can also post public messages about a location and track your friends. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Local Maps ry Privacy Policy, o r Legal Notices information. Select the desired information from the pop-up menu. ta – Terms, Privacy & Notices: displays the Terms and Conditions, Local is an application that uses Google Maps and your location to help you find Restaurants, Cafes, Bars, Attractions, and other businesses. You can also add your own locations. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Local 2. Tap on one of the business categories to search for a particular business. All of the business categories that are close to you will be displayed. 3. Tap on a business that you want to see the details for. on fid en 4. The business details such as address, phone, website, and location are displayed. You can also see reviews from around the web and from Google users. Important! Before using Google Maps you must have at least an active data (3G) connection. The Maps application does not cover every country or city. Enabling a Location Source Before you use Google Maps and find your location or search for places of interest, you must enable a location source. To enable the location source you must enable the wireless network, or enable the GPS satellites. ➔ 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings Location services. 2. Tap the Use GPS satellites field. A green checkmark will display next to the field. Applications 187 – Display: allows you to display the Zoom Buttons and Scale Bar on the screen. – Cache: allows you to set options to pre-fetch map tiles when ry Note: Selecting Use GPS satellites allows you to locate places of interest at the street-level. However, this also requires a clear view of the sky and uses more battery power. not using WiFi and to clear the cache that holds the map tiles. – Location settings: allows you to manage the settings for your • in a tunnel or underground passage • in poor weather • around high-voltage or electromagnetic fields • in a vehicle with tinted windows – Labs: this is a testing ground for experimental features that tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Background location reporting, Location history, Latitude location sharing, and Check-ins. aren’t ready for primetime. They may change, break or disappear at any time. Click on a Lab to enable or disable it. – What’s New: allows you to see the latest changes in Play Store and update your app. Using Maps 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Maps A map will display with your location in the very center. fid en 2. Press to display the following options: • Clear Map: allows you to remove all markings and layers from the map. • Make available offline: allows you to save a selected area to you My places folder where you can view it later. on • Settings: the following Map options are available: 188 ta To receive better GPS signals, avoid using your device in the following conditions: • inside a building or between buildings – About: displays general information about Google maps such as Version, Platform, Locale, Total data sent, Total data received, Free memory, etc. – Feedback: allows you to send feedback to Google. – Terms, Privacy & Notices: displays the Terms and Conditions, Privacy Policy, o r Legal Notices information. Select the desired information from the pop-up menu. • Help: displays the Google Mobile Help web page where you can receive help on Google Maps. Mobile Hotspot Music Hub tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Messages This application allows you to share your phones’s mobile data connection via USB or as a portable Wi-Fi hotspot. For more information, refer to “Tethering & portable hotspot” on page 123. ry Samsung Media Hub is your one stop for the hottest movie and TV content. You can rent or purchase your favorite content and watch from the convenience of anywhere. For more information, refer to “Media Hub” on page 85. ta Media Hub The AT&T Messages app brings your texts, calls, and voicemail messages together into a single conversation thread and is accessible by phone or computer. For more information, refer to “Messages App” on page 115. Messaging The Music Hub app lets you upload your music collection to the cloud, stream and purchase songs from an extensive catalog, and listen to personal radio. For more information, refer to “Music Hub” on page 87. Music Player You can send and receive different types of messages. For more information, refer to “Messaging” on page 104. Messenger on fid en Messenger allows you to bring groups of friends together into a simple group conversation. When you get a new conversation in Messenger, Google+ sends an update to your phone. For more information, refer to “Messenger” on page 115. Music Player allows you to play music files that you have stored on your phone and memory card. You can also create playlists. For more information, refer to “Music Player” on page 88. My Files My Files allows you to manage your sounds, images, videos, bluetooth files, Android files, and other memory card data in one convenient location. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ My Files 2. Tap sdcard to see the contents of your internal SD card. 3. The following folders may display: Applications 189 • Application: this folder contains app info for S Memo. • Bluetooth: this folder stores files sent via a Bluetooth device. • Download: this folder contains downloads you have made. • Movies: this folder contains your Video and Movie files. • Music: this folder contains your Music files. • Notifications: this folder contains all of the notifications you have received. • Pictures: this folder contains your photos. fid en • Podcasts: this folder contains all of your podcasts. • Ringtones: this folder contains any ringtones you have purchased. on 4. If you have an external SD card inserted, tap extSdcard to see the contents of your external SD card (memory card). 190 myAT&T The myAT&T application allows you to manage your own AT&T account. You can review and pay your bill, check minutes and data usage, upgrade to a new device, or change your rate plan. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie • DCIM: this is the default location for pictures and videos taken by the device. Tap DCIM ➔ Camera to view the picture or video files. For more information, refer to “Viewing Pictures” on page 94. Also, see “Viewing Videos” on page 94. Note: Different folders may appear depending on how your phone is configured. ry • Android: the Android folder stores files that are used in Android applications. ta • Alarms: this folder contains any alarm files you may have. Note: The first time you use myAT&T, you will need to download the updated application from the Play Store. When the Play Store page displays, tap Update. For more information, refer to “Play Store” on page 194. Initial Setup 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ myAT&T 2. Sign into your Google Account. If you haven’t set up an account, see “Creating a New Google Account” on page 13. 3. After signing into your Google Account, the Play Store displays the myAT&T application. Tap the application. 4. Tap Update. Using myAT&T ➔ myAT&T The myAT&T page is displayed. Launching Navigation 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Navigation ta 1. From the Home screen, tap ry • around high-voltage or electromagnetic fields • in a vehicle with tinted windows 5. Follow the on-screen instructions. 2. Read the Navigation information page and tap Accept to continue or Don’t accept to exit. 3. Enter your User ID and Password using the onscreen keypad, then tap Login. 3. Select one of the following options: • Speak destination: allows you to speak your destination. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. Navigation tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie 2. Read the Terms and Conditions and tap Accept to continue. • Type destination: allows you to use the keypad to enter your destination. • Go home: takes you to your home address. The first time you are prompted to enter it. Navigation is an internet-connected GPS navigation system with voice guidance. You can type or speak your destination. • Map: takes you to the map location of your present location using GPS. Note: For voice-guided navigation, you need to install text-tospeech support from the Play Store. on • in a tunnel or underground passage • in poor weather fid en To receive better GPS signals, avoid using your device in the following conditions: • inside a building or between buildings • Recent Destinations: allows you to access information on previous destinations you have used. This option only appears after you have entered one or more destinations. Navigation Options 䡲 The map displays with your location in the center. Press for the following options: Applications 191 – Traffic view: displays real-time traffic conditions so you can plan the fastest route. – Satellite: allows you to see you the map as a satellite image. – Parking: allows you to see registered parking areas. – Gas stations: allows you to see registered gas stations. – ATMs & banks: allows you to see registered ATMs and Banks. – Restaurants: allows you to see registered restaurants. • Settings: includes the following options: – Screen Dimming: set this option to dim the screen between fid en instructions in order to conserve battery power. – Terms, privacy & notices: displays Terms and Conditions for Google mobile products, the Google Privacy Policy, and Google legal notices. on • Exit Navigation: exits the Navigation application and returns you to the Application Menu screen. 192 Your phone’s built-in GPS hardware allows you to get realtime driving directions to selected locations or establishments based on your current location. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie • Layers: are additional items that you can have displayed on your map. They include: Obtaining Driving Directions ry • Search: allows you to speak or type a destination, place, or service to search for. • Help: takes you to the Google Mobile Help web page. ta • Set Destination: displays the Choose Destination screen where you can speak or type your destination. Paper Artist 2. Tap either Speak Destination or Type Destination. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie 3. If typing in the address, enter the address, City, and State using the keypad. As you type, possible addresses will be displayed. Tap on one when you see the address you want. Paper Artist provides access to an in-device graphics program. You can start from an empty canvas or import a picture from your Gallery to get you started. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Paper Artist ry ➔ Navigation ta Using a Physical Address 1. From the Home screen, tap The route will be displayed. 4. If speaking the address, the Voice guidance screen is displayed. For voice-guided navigation you need to install text-to-speech support from the Play Store. Tap Install to install the application or tap Skip to exit. fid en Note: You will need to be signed on to your Google account before downloading applications from the Play Store. For more information, refer to “Creating a New Google Account” on page 13. on 5. As you drive the route display will be updated and you will receive voice-guided navigation directions. Phone The Phone application allows you to access the dialer keypad, call logs, and favorites. For more information, refer to “Call Functions” on page 48. Play Books With Google Play Books, you can find more than 3 million free e-books and hundreds of thousands more to buy in the eBookstore. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Play Books 2. Log on to your Google account. For more information, refer to “Creating a New Google Account” on page 13. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions for using the Play Books application. Applications 193 Play Movies & TV ry With Google Play Movies & TV, you can rent thousands of different movies and television shows. You can watch instantly, or download your movie or show for offline viewing at a later time. For more information, refer to “Play Movies & TV” on page 93. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie With Google Play Magazines, you can subscribe to your favorite magazines and have them available to read on your phone at any time or any place. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Play Magazines ta Play Magazines 2. Log on to your Google account if you have not already done so. For more information, refer to “Creating a New Google Account” on page 13. 3. At the Welcome! display, tap the shop icon browse the full catalog. to 4. Read the Google Play Terms of Service and tap Accept. 5. Sweep the screen to the left or right to view Categories, Featured, Top Selling, and New Arrivals. 6. Tap a magazine to see more information and subscribe. 194 on fid en 7. Follow the on-screen instructions to subscribe to a magazine. Play Music With Google Play Music, you can play music that you have added to your music file as well as any music you copied from your PC. While offline, you can listen to music you have copied from your PC. For more information, refer to “Google Play Music” on page 91. Play Store Play Store provides access to downloadable applications and games to install on your phone. Play Store also allows you to provide feedback and comments about an application, or flag an application that might be incompatible with your phone. Before using the Play Store you must have a Google Account. For more information, refer to “Using Gmail” on page 113. 1. From the main Home screen, tap Play Store 2. Sign in to your Google account. 5. Follow on the on-screen instructions. Polaris Office 4.0 ® Polaris Office Mobile for Android is a Microsoft Office compatible office suite. This application provides a central place for managing your documents online or offline. The application can also open Adobe PDF (Portable Document Format) files. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Polaris Office 4.0 fid en 2. Enter your Email information (if desired) and touch Done to complete the process. – or – Touch Skip to ignore this registration. The main Polaris Office screen displays. on ry Use this application to create notes with productivity tools that turn handwriting into typed text and correct drawn shapes, lines, and formulas to make them perfect. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ S Note 2. Read the information at the Learn about application pop-up and tap OK. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie 4. Tap Apps, Games, or AT&T to download or purchase games or applications. You can also download updates to existing applications. S Note ta 3. The first time you sign in, the Play Store Terms of Service will be displayed. Tap Accept to continue or Decline to exit. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions to use Polaris Office. ➔ Tutorial from the main S Note screen to 3. Tap learn more about the application, then follow the onscreen instructions. S Suggest This application provides on-screen recommendations for applications that are specifically supported and made for use on your device. Note: Access to this feature requires that you already be logged in to your Samsung account application. For more information, refer to “Creating a Samsung Account” on page 12. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ S Suggest. 2. Read the terms and conditions. Applications 195 3. Place a check mark in the Agree field then tap Agree. 6. Read the information on the Wake up S Voice screen, then tap Next. 7. Read the information on the What Can I Say? screen, then tap Finish. 5. Follow the on-screen download and installation instructions. 8. At the S Voice screen, say “Hi Galaxy” to wake up S voice. ta tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie S Voice With the S Voice application you can use your voice to perform operations that you would normally have to do by hand such as dialing a phone number, texting a message, playing music, etc. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ S Voice 2. Read the Samsung Disclaimer then tap Confirm to continue. 3. Read the Vlingo Terms of Service then tap Agree to continue. fid en 4. Read the information on the About S Voice screen, then tap Next. on 5. Read the information on the Say what you want screen, then tap Next. 196 ry 4. Select an application from one of the available categories (Picks, Categories, Games, Friends, and Info. 9. Speak into the phone and follow the on-screen instructions. Settings This widget navigates to the sound and phone settings for your phone. It includes such settings as: display, security, memory, and any extra settings associated with your phone. For more information, refer to “Changing Your Settings” on page 119. Talk Google Talk is a free Windows and web-based application for instant messaging offered by Google. Conversation logs are automatically saved to a Chats area in your Gmail account. This allows you to search a chat log and store them in your Gmail accounts. For more information, refer to “Google Talk” on page 114. Voice Recorder 2. To start recording, tap Record microphone. • Delete: allows you to delete 1 or more voice recordings. Tap the recordings to delete and tap Delete. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie The Voice Recorder allows you to record an audio file up to one minute long and then immediately share it using AllShare Play, Messaging, Gmail, or via Bluetooth. Recording time will vary based on the available memory within the phone. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Voice Recorder 5. Press to display the following options: • Share via: allows you to share your recording using Bluetooth, Email, Gmail, Group Cast, Messaging, or Wi-Fi Direct. ry The Video Player application plays video files stored on your memory card. For more information, refer to “Video Player” on page 92. 4. Tap List to display a list of all your voice recordings. Tap a voice recording to play it. ta Video Player and speak into the on fid en 3. During the recording process you can either tap Stop to stop and save the recording or Pause to temporarily halt the recording. After pausing, tap Record to resume recording. Once the audio recording has stopped, the message is automatically saved. Tap Cancel to cancel the recording without saving. • Rename: allows you to rename your recordings. • Settings: the following settings are available: – Storage: allows you to choose where your recordings will be saved. Select between Phone or memory card. – Default name: allows you to choose the name prefix for your recordings. For example, if your Default name is Voice, your recordings would be named Voice 001, Voice 002, Voice 003, etc. – Recording quality: allows you to set the recording quality to High or Normal. – Limit for MMS: allows you to select On or Off. If you Limit for MMS by selecting On, you will be assured that the recording can be sent in a message. Applications 197 YouTube When the Google Voice Search screen displays, speak the word or words that you would like to search for on the internet. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie 2. 3. If the timer expires and the mic icon changes from red to gray, tap the mic icon and speak the word or words that you would like to search for on the internet. Results are displayed on your phone. 4. The following options are available at the bottom of your screen: • Web: After selecting a different option, tap Web to return to the original search results. fid en • Images: Displays images for your search. • Places: Displays places and businesses in your local area pertaining to your search. on • More: After tapping More, sweep your screen to the left to see additional options such as News, Shopping, Videos, Blogs, Discussions, and Books. 198 YouTube™ is a video sharing website on which users can upload and share videos. The site is used to display a wide variety of user-generated video content, including movie clips, TV clips, and music videos, as well as video content such as video blogging, informational shorts and other original videos. ry The Google Voice Search application allows you to search the web using only your voice. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Voice Search ta Voice Search Note: YouTube is a data-intensive feature. It is recommended that you upgrade to a large data plan to avoid additional data charges. 1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ YouTube to search for specific videos, 2. Tap the search field scroll down to browse through the main page thumbnails, or scroll to the bottom to explore additional options. 3. To view a video, tap an available preview thumbnail or tap the title link. 4. If you prefer high quality video, as the video starts to play, tap HQ. . ➔ YPmobile ry 2. Sign on to your Google account if you have not already done so. For more information, refer to “Creating a New Google Account” on page 13. 3. Read the End-User License Agreement (EULA) and tap Accept to continue. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Note: It is not necessary to sign in to the YouTube site to view content. However, if you wish to sign in to access additional options, access the page via the Web browser and tap Sign in at the top right corner, enter your YouTube or Google username and password, and tap Sign in. 1. From the Home screen, tap ta 5. Tap to go to your camcorder so you can take your own videos. For more information, refer to “Using the Camcorder” on page 100. 4. Read the introduction information and tap Continue. 5. Your location is found using GPS. Tap OK to allow YPmobile to use your current location. 6. Tap the Find a business nearby! field. YPmobile The Yellowpages Mobile application provides quick and ready access to businesses, map locations, and storage of your favorite searches. This application allows you to tap into local businesses, locations, and events, connecting you to your search in real-time. on fid en Note: The first time you use YP, you will need to download the updated application from the Play Store. When the Play Store page displays, tap Update or Install then follow the onscreen instructions. For more information, refer to “Play Store” on page 194. 7. Enter information in the What: and Near: fields and tap Search. 8. Results will be displayed. 9. Tap map. to see the locations marked with pins on the 10. Pinch the map screen inwards to zoom out or pinch it outwards to zoom in. 11. Tap a pin to read information about the location. 12. Tap to display additional options. Applications 199 Section 11: Health and Safety Information ta ry with RF energy, these studies have failed to be replicated. The majority of studies published have failed to show an association between exposure to radio frequency from a cell phone and health problems. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie This section outlines the safety precautions associated with using your phone. The terms “mobile device” or “cell phone” are used in this section to refer to your phone. Read this information before using your mobile device. Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) Signals The U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has published information for consumers relating to Radio Frequency (RF) exposure from wireless phones. The FDA publication includes the following information: Do cell phones pose a health hazard? fid en Many people are concerned that cell phone radiation will cause cancer or other serious health hazards. The weight of scientific evidence has not linked cell phones with any health problems. 200 on Cell phones emit low levels of Radio Frequency (RF) energy. Over the past 15 years, scientists have conducted hundreds of studies looking at the biological effects of the radio frequency energy emitted by cell phones. While some researchers have reported biological changes associated The low levels of RF cell phones emit while in use are in the microwave frequency range. They also emit RF at substantially reduced time intervals when in the stand-by mode. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health effects (by heating tissue), exposure to low level RF that does not produce heating effects causes no known adverse health effects. The biological effects of radio frequency energy should not be confused with the effects from other types of electromagnetic energy. Very high levels of electromagnetic energy, such as is found in X-rays and gamma rays, can ionize biological tissues. Ionization is a process where electrons are stripped away from their normal locations in atoms and molecules. It can permanently damage biological tissues including DNA, the genetic material. Interphone Study ta ry Interphone is a large international study designed to determine whether cell phones increase the risk of head and neck cancer. A report published in the International Journal of Epidemiology (June, 2010) compared cell phone usage for more than 5,000 people with brain tumors (glioma and meningioma) and a similar number of healthy controls. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie The energy levels associated with radio frequency energy, including both radio waves and microwaves, are not great enough to cause ionization of atoms and molecules. Therefore, RF energy is a type of non-ionizing radiation. Other types of non-ionizing radiation include visible light, infrared radiation (heat), and other forms of electromagnetic radiation with relatively low frequencies. While RF energy does not ionize particles, large amounts can increase body temperatures and cause tissue damage. Two areas of the body, the eyes and the testes, are particularly vulnerable to RF heating because there is relatively little blood flow in them to carry away excess heat. Research Results to Date: Is there a connection between RF and certain health problems? The results of most studies conducted to date say no. In addition, attempts to replicate and confirm the few studies that have shown a connection have failed. on fid en The scientific community at large therefore believes that the weight of scientific evidence does not show an association between exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) from cell phones and adverse health outcomes. Still the scientific community has supported additional research to address gaps in knowledge. Some of these studies are described below. Results of this study did NOT show that cell phones caused brain cancer. In this study, most people had no increased risk of brain cancer from using cell phones. For people with the heaviest use of cell phones (an average of more than ½ hour per day, every day, for over 10 years) the study suggested a slight increase in brain cancer. However, the authors determined that biases and errors prevented any conclusions being drawn from this data. Additional information about Interphone can be found at http://www.iarc.fr/en/media-centre/pr/2010/pdfs/pr200_E.pdf. Interphone is the largest cell phone study to date, but it did not answer all questions about cell phone safety. Additional research is being conducted around the world, and the FDA continues to monitor developments in this field. Health and Safety Information 201 Surveillance, Epidemiology, and End Results (SEER) Program of the National Cancer Institute The COSMOS study aims to conduct long-term health monitoring of a large group of people to determine if there are any health issues linked to long-term exposure to radio frequency energy from cell phone use. The COSMOS study will follow approximately 300,000 adult cell phone users in Europe for 20 to 30 years. Additional information about the COSMOS study can be found at http://www.ukcosmos.org/index.html. Risk of Brain Cancer from Exposure to Radio Frequency Fields in Childhood and Adolescence (MOBI-KIDS) The National Cancer Institute (NCI) actively follows cancer statistics in the United States to detect any change in rates of new cases for brain cancer. If cell phones play a role in risk for brain cancer, rates should go up, because heavy cell phone use has been common for quite some time in the U.S. Between 1987 and 2005, the overall age-adjusted incidence of brain cancer did not increase. Additional information about SEER can be found at http://seer.cancer.gov/. Cell Phone Industry Actions tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie ta ry International Cohort Study on Mobile Phone Users (COSMOS) 202 on fid en MOBI-KIDS is an international study investigating the relationship between exposure to radio frequency energy from communication technologies including cell phones and brain cancer in young people. This is an international multi-center study involving 14 European and non-European countries. Additional information about MOBI-KIDS can be found at http://www.creal.cat/programes-recerca/en_projectes-creal/ view.php?ID=39. Although the existing scientific data do not justify FDA regulatory actions, the FDA has urged the cell phone industry to take a number of steps, including the following: • Support-needed research on possible biological effects of RF for the type of signal emitted by cell phones; • Design cell phones in a way that minimizes any RF exposure to the user; and • Cooperate in providing users of cell phones with the current information on cell phone use and human health concerns. Reducing Exposure: Hands-Free Kits and Other Accessories Steps to Reduce Exposure to Radio Frequency Energy If there is a risk from being exposed to radio frequency energy (RF) from cell phones - and at this point we do not know that there is - it is probably very small. But, if you are concerned about avoiding even potential risks, you can take a few simple steps to minimize your RF exposure. • Reduce the amount of time spent using your cell phone; • Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between fid en your head and the cell phone. Hands-Free Kits ta ry Headsets can substantially reduce exposure because the phone is held away from the head in the user's hand or in approved body-worn accessories. Cell phones marketed in the U.S. are required to meet RF exposure compliance requirements when used against the head and against the body. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie The FDA also is working with voluntary standard-setting bodies such as the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE), the International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP), and others to assure that safety standards continue to adequately protect the public. on Hands-free kits may include audio or Bluetooth® headsets and various types of body-worn accessories such as belt-clips and holsters. Combinations of these can be used to reduce RF energy absorption from cell phones. Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that hands-free kits reduce risks. Hands-free kits can be used for convenience and comfort. They are also required by law in many states if you want to use your phone while driving. Cell Phone Accessories that Claim to Shield the Head from RF Radiation Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that accessories which claim to shield the head from those emissions reduce risks. Some products that claim to shield the user from RF absorption use special phone cases, while others involve nothing more than a metallic accessory attached to the phone. Health and Safety Information 203 Children and Cell Phones ry tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie • Environmental Protection Agency (EPA): The scientific evidence does not show a danger to any users of cell phones from RF exposure, including children and teenagers. The steps adults can take to reduce RF exposure apply to children and teenagers as well. • Reduce the amount of time spent on the cell phone; • Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between the head and the cell phone. http://www.epa.gov/radtown/wireless-tech.html. • Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/radiofrequencyradiation/. (Note: This web address is case sensitive.) • National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH): http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/. • World Health Organization (WHO): on fid en Some groups sponsored by other national governments have advised that children be discouraged from using cell phones at all. For example, The Stewart Report from the United Kingdom made such a recommendation in December 2000. In this report, a group of independent experts noted that no evidence exists that using a cell phone causes brain tumors or other ill effects. Their recommendation to limit cell phone use by children was strictly precautionary; it was not based on scientific evidence that any health hazard exists. 204 Additional information on the safety of RF exposures from various sources can be obtained from the following organizations (updated 10/1/2010): • FCC RF Safety Program: http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/. ta Studies have shown that these products generally do not work as advertised. Unlike “hands-free” kits, these so-called “shields” may interfere with proper operation of the phone. The phone may be forced to boost its power to compensate, leading to an increase in RF absorption. http://www.who.int/peh-emf/en/. • International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection: http://www.icnirp.de. • Health Protection Agency: http://www.hpa.org.uk/Topics/Radiation/. The FCC SAR limit incorporates a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection to the public and to account for any variations in measurements. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Certification Information expressed in units of watts per kilogram (W/kg). The FCC requires wireless phones to comply with a safety limit of 1.6 watts per kilogram (1.6 W/kg). ry http://www.fda.gov/Radiation-EmittingProducts/ RadiationEmittingProductsandProcedures/ HomeBusinessandEntertainment/CellPhones/default.htm. ta • US Food and Drug Administration: Your wireless phone is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to exceed the exposure limits for Radio Frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) of the U.S. Government. fid en These FCC RF exposure limits are derived from the recommendations of two expert organizations: the National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement (NCRP) and the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). In both cases, the recommendations were developed by scientific and engineering experts drawn from industry, government, and academia after extensive reviews of the scientific literature related to the biological effects of RF energy. on The RF exposure limit set by the FCC for wireless mobile phones employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate (SAR). The SAR is a measure of the rate of absorption of RF energy by the human body SAR tests are conducted using standard operating positions accepted by the FCC with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual SAR level of the phone while operating can be well below the maximum reported value. This is because the phone is designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a wireless base station antenna, the lower the power output of the phone. Before a new model phone is available for sale to the public, it must be tested and certified to the FCC that it does not exceed the SAR limit established by the FCC. Tests for each model phone are performed in positions and locations (e.g. at the ear and worn on the body) as required by the FCC. For body-worn operation, this phone has been tested and meets Health and Safety Information 205 • Body-worn: ?.?? W/kg. on fid en SAR information on this and other model phones can be accessed online on the FCC's website through http:// transition.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/sar.html. To find information that pertains to a particular model phone, this site uses the phone FCC ID number which is usually printed somewhere on the case of the phone. Sometimes it may be necessary to remove the battery pack to find the number. Once you have the FCC ID number for a particular phone, follow the instructions on the website and it should provide values for typical or maximum SAR for a particular phone. Additional 206 ry FCC Part 15 Information to User Pursuant to part 15.21 of the FCC Rules, you are cautioned that changes or modifications not expressly approved by Samsung could void your authority to operate the device. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines. The FCC has granted an Equipment Authorization for this mobile phone with all reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance with the FCC RF exposure guidelines. The maximum SAR values for this model phone as reported to the FCC are: • Head: ?.?? W/kg. SAR information can also be obtained at http://www.fcc.gov/encyclopedia/specific-absorption-rate-sarcellular-telephones. ta FCC RF exposure guidelines when used with an accessory that contains no metal and that positions the mobile device a minimum of 1.0 cm from the body. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, ry Check the laws and regulations on the use of mobile devices and their accessories in the areas where you drive. Always obey them. The use of these devices may be prohibited or restricted in certain areas. For example, only hands-free use may be permitted in certain areas. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie • Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. • Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from impaired. Samsung is committed to promoting responsible driving and giving drivers the tools they need to understand and address distractions. ta which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: • Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. that to which the receiver is connected. • Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Smart Practices While Driving On the Road - Off the Phone The primary responsibility of every driver is the safe operation of his or her vehicle. on fid en Responsible drivers understand that no secondary task should be performed while driving whether it be eating, drinking, talking to passengers, or talking on a mobile phone - unless the driver has assessed the driving conditions and is confident that the secondary task will not interfere with their primary responsibility. Do not engage in any activity while driving a moving vehicle which may cause you to take your eyes off the road or become so absorbed in the activity that your ability to concentrate on the act of driving becomes Before answering calls, consider your circumstances. Let the call go to voicemail when driving conditions require. Remember, driving comes first, not the call! If you consider a call necessary and appropriate, follow these tips: • Use a hands-free device; • Secure your phone within easy reach; • Place calls when you are not moving; • Plan calls when your car will be stationary; • Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations; • Let the person with whom you are speaking know that you are driving and will suspend the call if necessary; • Do not take notes or look up phone numbers while driving; Health and Safety Information 207 Never mount this device in a manner that will obstruct the driver's clear view of the street and traffic. Never use wireless data services such as text messaging, Web browsing, or e-mail while operating a vehicle. Never watch videos, such as a movie or clip, or play video games while operating a vehicle. For more information, go to http://www.ctia.org. fid en Battery Use and Safety on Important! Handle and store batteries properly to avoid injury or damage. Most battery issues arise from improper handling of batteries and, particularly, from the continued use of damaged batteries. 208 ry attempt to change the form of your battery. Do not put a high degree of pressure on the battery. This can cause leakage or an internal short-circuit, resulting in overheating. • Do not let the phone or battery come in contact with liquids. Liquids can get into the phone's circuits, leading to corrosion. Even when the phone appears to be dry and appears to operate normally, the circuitry could slowly corrode and pose a safety hazard. If the phone and/or battery get wet, have them checked by your service provider or contact Samsung, even if they appear to be working properly. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Laws in some states may prohibit mounting this device on or near the windshield of an automobile. In other states, the law may permit mounting this device only in specific locations in the automobile. Be sure to consult the state and local laws or ordinances where you drive before mounting this device in an automobile. Failure to comply with these restrictions could result in fines, penalties, or other damages. • Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, shred, or otherwise ta Notice regarding legal restrictions on mounting this device in an automobile: • Do not place your battery in or near a heat source. Excessive heating can damage the phone or the battery and could cause the phone or the battery to explode. Do not dry a wet or damp battery with an appliance or heat source such as a microwave oven, hair dryer, iron, or radiator. Avoid leaving your phone in your car in high temperatures. • Do not dispose of the phone or the battery in a fire. The phone or the battery may explode when overheated. • Avoid dropping the cell phone. Dropping the phone or the Use of a non-Samsung-approved battery or charger may present a risk of fire, explosion, leakage, or other hazard. Samsung's warranty does not cover damage to the phone caused by non-Samsung-approved batteries and/or chargers. • Do not use incompatible cell phone batteries and chargers. Some websites and second-hand dealers not associated with reputable manufacturers and carriers, might be selling incompatible or even counterfeit batteries and chargers. Consumers should purchase manufacturer or carrier-recommended products and accessories. If unsure about whether a replacement battery or charger is compatible, contact the manufacturer of the battery or charger. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie battery, especially on a hard surface, can potentially cause damage to the phone and battery. If you suspect damage to the phone or battery, take it to a service center for inspection. WARNING! ry battery fluid come in contact with your eyes, skin or clothing. For safe disposal options, contact your nearest Samsung-authorized service center. ta • Do not handle a damaged or leaking battery. Do not let leaking • Never use any charger or battery that is damaged in any way. • Do not allow the battery to touch metal objects. Accidental fid en short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object (coin, key, jewelry, clip, or pen) causes a direct connection between the + and - terminals of the battery (metal strips on the battery), for example when you carry a spare battery in a pocket or bag. Short-circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the object causing the short-circuiting. on Important! Use only Samsung-approved batteries, and recharge your battery only with Samsung-approved chargers which are specifically designed for your phone. • Misuse or use of incompatible phones, batteries, and charging devices could result in damage to the equipment and a possible risk of fire, explosion, or leakage, leading to serious injuries, damages to your phone, or other serious hazard. Health and Safety Information 209 tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Proper disposal of your mobile device and its battery is not only important for safety, it benefits the environment. Batteries must be recycled or disposed of properly. Recycling programs for your mobile device, batteries, and accessories may not be available in your area. We've made it easy for you to recycle your old Samsung mobile device by working with respected take-back companies in every state in the country. Drop It Off on fid en You can drop off your Samsung-branded mobile device and batteries for recycling at one of our numerous Samsung Recycling Direct (SM) locations. A list of these locations may be found at: http://pages.samsung.com/us/recyclingdirect/ usactivities_environment_samsungrecyclingdirect_locations.jsp 210 Consumers may also recycle their used mobile device or batteries at many retail or carrier-provided locations where mobile devices and batteries are sold. Additional information regarding specific locations may be found at: http://www.epa.gov/epawaste/partnerships/plugin/cellphone/ index.htm or at http://www.call2recycle.org/. ry Samsung cares for the environment and encourages its customers to recycle Samsung mobile devices and genuine Samsung accessories. Samsung-branded devices and batteries will be accepted at these locations for no fee. ta Samsung Mobile Products and Recycling Mail It In The Samsung Mobile Take-Back Program will provide Samsung customers with a free recycling mailing label. Just go to http://www.samsung.com/us/aboutsamsung/citizenship/ usactivities_environment_samsungrecyclingdirect.html?INT=ST A_recyle_your_phone_page and follow the instructions to print out a free pre-paid postage label and then send your old mobile device or battery to the address listed, via U.S. Mail, for recycling. Dispose of unwanted electronics through an approved recycler. To find the nearest recycling location, go to our website: www.samsung.com/recyclingdirect Or call, (877) 278-0799. Warning! Never dispose of batteries in a fire because they may explode. UL Certified Travel Charger ry tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Dispose of your mobile device and batteries in accordance with local regulations. In some areas, the disposal of these items in household or business trash may be prohibited. Help us protect the environment - recycle! FOR CONNECTION TO A SUPPLY NOT IN NORTH AMERICA, USE AN ATTACHMENT PLUG ADAPTOR OF THE PROPER CONFIGURATION FOR THE POWER OUTLET. THIS POWER UNIT IS INTENDED TO BE CORRECTLY ORIENTED IN A VERTICAL OR HORIZONTAL OR FLOOR MOUNT POSITION. ta Follow local regulations regarding disposal of mobile devices and batteries The Travel Charger for this phone has met applicable UL safety requirements. Please adhere to the following safety instructions per UL guidelines: FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS OUTLINED MAY LEAD TO SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY AND POSSIBLE PROPERTY DAMAGE. Display / Touch-Screen Please note the following information when using your mobile device: WARNING REGARDING DISPLAY The display on your mobile device is made of glass or acrylic and could break if your mobile device is dropped or if it receives significant impact. Do not use if screen is broken or cracked as this could cause injury to you. fid en IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS - SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. on DANGER - TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS. Health and Safety Information 211 GPS fid en Certain Samsung mobile devices can use a Global Positioning System (GPS) signal for location based applications. A GPS uses satellites controlled by the U.S. Government that are subject to changes implemented in accordance with the Department of Defense policy and the 2008 Federal Radio navigation Plan (FRP). Changes may affect the performance of location-based technology on your mobile device. on Even with GPS, when you make an emergency call: • Always tell the emergency responder your location to the best of your ability; and 212 responder instructs you. ry Navigation Maps, directions, and other navigation-data, including data relating to your current location, may contain inaccurate or incomplete data, and circumstances can and do change over time. In some areas, complete information may not be available. Therefore, you should always visually confirm that the navigational instructions are consistent with what you see before following them. All users should pay attention to road conditions, closures, traffic, and all other factors that may impact safe driving or walking. Always obey posted road signs. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie If your mobile device has a touch-screen display, please note that a touch-screen responds best to a light touch from the pad of your finger or a non-metallic stylus. Using excessive force or a metallic object when pressing on the touch-screen may damage the tempered glass surface and void the warranty. For more information, please refer to the “Standard Limited Warranty”. • Remain on the mobile device for as long as the emergency ta WARRANTY DISCLAIMER: PROPER USE OF A TOUCH-SCREEN MOBILE DEVICE Emergency Calls This mobile device, like any wireless mobile device, operates using radio signals, wireless and landline networks, as well as user-programmed functions, which cannot guarantee connection in all conditions, areas, or circumstances. Therefore, you should never rely solely on any wireless mobile device for essential communications (medical emergencies, for example). Before traveling in remote or underdeveloped areas, plan an alternate method of contacting emergency services personnel. Remember, to To make an emergency call: 1. If the phone is not on, switch it on. 2. From the Home screen, tap . The dialer is ry Your mobile device is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The suggestions below will help you fulfill any warranty obligations and allow you to enjoy this product for many years: Keep your Samsung Mobile Device away from: Liquids of any kind displayed. 3. Key in the emergency number for your present location (for example, 911 or other official emergency number). Emergency numbers vary by location. 4. Tap the Care and Maintenance tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Emergency calls may not be possible on all wireless mobile device networks or when certain network services and/or mobile device features are in use. Check with local service providers. may be the only means of communication at the scene of an accident; do not cut off the call until given permission to do so. ta make or receive any calls, the mobile device must be switched on and in a service area with adequate signal strength. key. on fid en If certain features are in use (call blocking, for example), you may first need to deactivate those features before you can make an emergency call. Consult your User Manual and your local cellular service provider. When making an emergency call, remember to give all the necessary information as accurately as possible. Remember that your mobile device Keep the mobile device dry. Precipitation, humidity, and liquids contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. If the mobile device does get wet, do not accelerate drying with the use of an oven, microwave, or dryer, because this may damage the mobile device and could cause a fire or explosion. Do not use the mobile device with a wet hand. Doing so may cause an electric shock to you or damage to the mobile device. Health and Safety Information 213 Responsible Listening Avoid temperatures below 0°C / 32°F or above 45°C / 113°F. Caution! Avoid potential hearing loss. Dust and dirt Do not expose your mobile device to dust, dirt, or sand. Cleaning solutions Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong detergents to clean the mobile device. Wipe it with a soft cloth slightly dampened in a mild soap-and-water solution. Shock or vibration fid en Do not drop, knock, or shake the mobile device. Rough handling can break internal circuit boards. Paint on Do not paint the mobile device. Paint can clog the device’s moving parts or ventilation openings and prevent proper operation. 214 Damage to hearing occurs when a person is exposed to loud sounds over time. The risk of hearing loss increases as sound is played louder and for longer durations. Prolonged exposure to loud sounds (including music) is the most common cause of preventable hearing loss. Some scientific research suggests that using portable audio devices, such as portable music players and cell phones, at high volume settings for long durations may lead to permanent noise-induced hearing loss. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Do not try to dry your mobile device in a microwave oven. Doing so may cause a fire or explosion. ta Microwaves ry Extreme heat or cold This includes the use of headphones (including headsets, earbuds, and Bluetooth® or other wireless devices). Exposure to very loud sound has also been associated in some studies with tinnitus (a ringing in the ear), hypersensitivity to sound, and distorted hearing. Individual susceptibility to noise-induced hearing loss and potential hearing problem varies. Additionally, the amount of sound produced by a portable audio device varies depending on the nature of the sound, the device settings, and the headphones that are used. As a result, there is no single volume setting that is appropriate for everyone or for every combination of sound, settings, and equipment. • Limit the amount of time you listen. As the volume increases, less You should follow some common sense recommendations when using any portable audio device: • Always turn the volume down before plugging the earphones into an audio source. such as rock concerts, that might cause temporary hearing loss. Temporary hearing loss might cause unsafe volumes to sound normal. ry ta tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie • Set the volume in a quiet environment and select the lowest volume at which you can hear adequately. time is required before you hearing could be affected. • Avoid using headphones after exposure to extremely loud noises, • Be aware that you can adapt to higher volume settings over time, not realizing that the higher volume may be harmful to your hearing. • Do not listen at any volume that causes you discomfort. If you experience ringing in your ears, hear muffled speech, or experience any temporary hearing difficulty after listening to your portable audio device, discontinue use and consult your doctor. You can obtain additional information on this subject from the following sources: • When using headphones, turn the volume down if you cannot hear the people speaking near you or if the person sitting next to you can hear what you are listening to. • Do not turn the volume up to block out noisy surroundings. If you on fid en choose to listen to your portable device in a noisy environment, use noise-cancelling headphones to block out background environmental noise. By blocking background environment noise, noise cancelling headphones should allow you to hear the music at lower volumes than when using earbuds. American Academy of Audiology 11730 Plaza American Drive, Suite 300 Reston, VA 20190 Voice: (800) 222-2336 Email: info@audiology.org Internet: http://www.audiology.org/Pages/ default.aspx Health and Safety Information 215 Email: cdcinfo@cdc.gov National Institute on Deafness and Other Communication Disorders Internet: http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/topics/noise/ default.html tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie 1-888-232-6348 TTY Email: nidcdinfo@nih.gov Operating Environment Internet: http://www.nidcd.nih.gov/ National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) 395 E Street, S.W., Suite 9200 Patriots Plaza Building Washington, DC 20201 on fid en Voice: 1-800-35-NIOSH (1-800-356-4674) 1-800-CDC-INFO (1-800-232-4636) Outside the U.S. 513-533-8328 216 ta ry National Institutes of Health 31 Center Drive, MSC 2320 Bethesda, MD 20892-2320 Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any area, and always switch your mobile device off whenever it is forbidden to use it, or when it may cause interference or danger. When connecting the mobile device or any accessory to another device, read its user's guide for detailed safety instructions. Do not connect incompatible products. Using Your Mobile Device Near Other Electronic Devices Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from Radio Frequency (RF) signals. However, certain electronic equipment may not be shielded against the RF signals from your wireless mobile device. Consult the manufacturer to discuss alternatives. Other Medical Devices Persons who have such devices: • Should ALWAYS keep the mobile device more than six (6) inches from their implantable medical device when the mobile device is turned ON; • Should not carry the mobile device in a breast pocket; • Should use the ear opposite the implantable medical device to minimize the potential for interference; • Should turn the mobile device OFF immediately if there is any reason to suspect that interference is taking place; • Should read and follow the directions from the manufacturer of fid en your implantable medical device. If you have any questions about using your wireless mobile device with an implantable medical device, consult your health care provider. For more information see: http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rffaqs.html#. on ry If you use any other personal medical devices, consult the manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately shielded from external RF energy. Your physician may be able to assist you in obtaining this information. Switch your mobile device off in health care facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF energy. Vehicles tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie A minimum separation of six (6) inches should be maintained between a handheld wireless mobile device and an implantable medical device, such as a pacemaker or implantable cardioverter defibrillator, to avoid potential interference with the device. ta Implantable Medical Devices RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles. Check with the manufacturer or its representative regarding your vehicle before using your mobile device in a motor vehicle. You should also consult the manufacturer of any equipment that has been added to your vehicle. Posted Facilities Switch your mobile device off in any facility where posted notices require you to do so. Potentially Explosive Environments Switch your mobile device off when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and instructions. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion Health and Safety Information 217 ry The U.S. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) has established requirements for digital wireless mobile devices to be compatible with hearing aids and other assistive hearing devices. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Users are reminded of the need to observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots (fuel storage and distribution areas), chemical plants, or where blasting operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often, but not always, clearly marked. They include below deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage facilities, vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane), areas where the air contains chemicals or particles, such as grain, dust, or metal powders, and any other area where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. When your Device is Wet FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC) Regulations for Wireless Devices ta or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Users are advised to switch the mobile device off while at a refueling point (service station). 218 on fid en Do not turn on your device if it is wet. If your device is already on, turn it off and remove the battery immediately (if the device will not turn off or you cannot remove the battery, leave it as-is). Then, dry the device with a towel and take it to a service center. When individuals employing some assistive hearing devices (hearing aids and cochlear implants) use wireless mobile devices, they may detect a buzzing, humming, or whining noise. Some hearing devices are more immune than others to this interference noise, and mobile devices also vary in the amount of interference they generate. The wireless telephone industry has developed a rating system for wireless mobile devices to assist hearing device users find mobile devices that may be compatible with their hearing devices. Not all mobile devices have been rated. Mobile devices that are rated have the rating on their box or a label located on the box. The ratings are not guarantees. Results will vary depending on the user's hearing device and hearing loss. If your hearing device happens to be vulnerable to interference, you may not hearing aid meets the M2 level rating and the wireless mobile device meets the M3 level rating, the sum of the two values equals M5. M-Ratings: Wireless mobile devices rated M3 or M4 meet FCC requirements and are likely to generate less interference to hearing devices than mobile devices that are not labeled. M4 is the better/higher of the two ratings. M-ratings refer to enabling acoustic coupling with hearing aids that do not operate in telecoil mode. Under the standard, this should provide the hearing aid user with normal use while using the hearing aid with the particular wireless mobile device. A sum of 6 or more would indicate excellent performance. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie ta ry be able to use a rated mobile device successfully. Trying out the mobile device with your hearing device is the best way to evaluate it for your personal needs. However, these are not guarantees that all users will be satisfied. T ratings work similarly. T-Ratings: Mobile devices rated T3 or T4 meet FCC requirements and are likely to generate less interference to hearing devices than mobile devices that are not labeled. T4 is the better/higher of the two ratings. T-ratings refer to enabling inductive coupling with hearing aids operating in telecoil mode. fid en Hearing devices may also be rated. Your hearing aid manufacturer or hearing health professional may help you find this rating. Higher ratings mean that the hearing device is relatively immune to interference noise. on Under the current industry standard, American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C63.19, the hearing aid and wireless mobile device rating values are added together to indicate how usable they are together. For example, if a M3 M2 T3 T2 Health and Safety Information 219 ry FCC Notice and Cautions FCC Notice The mobile device may cause TV or radio interference if used in close proximity to receiving equipment. The FCC can require you to stop using the mobile device if such interference cannot be eliminated. Vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane) must comply with the National Fire Protection Standard (NFPA-58). For a copy of this standard, contact the National Fire Protection Association. Cautions tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie This phone has been tested and rated for use with hearing aids for some of the wireless technologies that it uses. However, there may be some newer wireless technologies used in this phone that have not been tested yet for use with hearing aids. Keep the mobile device and all its parts and accessories out of the reach of small children. ta The HAC rating and measurement procedure are described in the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C63.19 standard. HAC for Newer Technologies It is important to try the different features of this phone thoroughly and in different locations, using your hearing aid or cochlear implant, to determine if you hear any interfering noise. Consult your service provider or the manufacturer of this phone for information on hearing aid compatibility. If you have questions about return or exchange policies, consult your service provider or phone retailer. fid en Restricting Children's Access to Your Mobile Device 220 on Your mobile device is not a toy. Do not allow children to play with it because they could hurt themselves and others, damage the mobile device, or make calls that increase your mobile device bill. Any changes or modifications to your mobile device not expressly approved in this document could void your warranty for this equipment and void your authority to operate this equipment. Only use approved batteries, antennas, and chargers. The use of any unauthorized accessories may be dangerous and void the mobile device warranty if said accessories cause damage or a defect to the mobile device. • Only qualified personnel should service the mobile device or tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie install the mobile device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty applicable to the device. • Ensure that any mobile devices or related equipment installed in your vehicle are securely mounted. • Check regularly that all wireless mobile device equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly. • When using a headset in dry environments, static electricity can fid en build up in the headset and cause a small quick static electrical shock. To minimize the risk of electrostatic discharge from the headset avoid using the headset in extremely dry environments or touch a grounded unpainted metal object to discharge static electricity before inserting the headset. • Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials in the same compartment as the mobile device, its parts, or accessories. on inflates with great force. Do not place objects, including installed or portable wireless equipment near or in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area. If wireless equipment is improperly installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury could result. ry Other Important Safety Information • For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that an air bag ta Although your mobile device is quite sturdy, it is a complex piece of equipment and can be broken. Avoid dropping, hitting, bending, or sitting on it. • Switch your mobile device off before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless mobile devices in aircraft is illegal and may be dangerous to the aircraft's operation. Check with appropriate authorities before using any function of a mobile device while on an aircraft. • Failure to observe these instructions may lead to the suspension or denial of cell phone services to the offender, or legal action, or both. • While using your device, leave some lights on in the room and do not hold the screen too close to your eyes. • Seizures or blackouts can occur when you are exposed to flashing lights while watching videos or playing games for extended periods. If you feel any discomfort, stop using the device immediately. Health and Safety Information 221 ta tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie perform actions, such as pressing keys, drawing characters on a touch screen with your fingers, or playing games, you may experience occasional discomfort in your hands, neck, shoulders, or other parts of your body. When using your device for extended periods, hold the device with a relaxed grip, press the keys lightly, and take frequent breaks. If you continue to have discomfort during or after such use, stop use and see a physician. ry • Reduce risk of repetitive motion injuries. When you repetitively • If your device has a camera flash or light, do not use the flash or 222 on fid en light close to the eyes of people or pets. [122011] Section 12: Warranty Information 1 Year Batteries 1 Year Case/Pouch/Holster 90 Days tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie SAMSUNG TELECOMMUNICATIONS AMERICA, LLC (“SAMSUNG”) warrants that SAMSUNG’s handsets and accessories (“Products”) are free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for the period commencing upon the date of purchase by the first consumer purchaser and continuing for the following specified period of time after that date: fid en Other Phone Accessories 1 Year What is not covered? ta What is covered and for how long? Phone This Limited Warranty does not cover: (a) defects or damage resulting from accident, misuse, abnormal use, abnormal conditions, improper storage, exposure to liquid, moisture, dampness, sand or dirt, neglect, or unusual physical, electrical or electromechanical stress; (b) scratches, dents and cosmetic damage, unless caused by SAMSUNG; (c) defects or damage resulting from excessive force or use of a metallic object when pressing on a touch screen; (d) equipment that has the serial number or the enhancement data code removed, defaced, damaged, altered or made illegible; (e) ordinary wear and tear; (f) defects or damage resulting from the use of Product in conjunction or connection with accessories, products, or ancillary/peripheral equipment not furnished or approved by SAMSUNG; (g) defects or damage resulting from improper testing, operation, maintenance, installation, service, or adjustment not furnished or approved by SAMSUNG; (h) defects or damage resulting from external causes such as collision with an object, fire, flooding, dirt, windstorm, lightning, earthquake, exposure to weather conditions, theft, blown fuse, or improper use of any electrical source; (i) defects or damage resulting from cellular signal reception ry Standard Limited Warranty on This Limited Warranty is conditioned upon proper use of the Product. Warranty Information 223 What are SAMSUNG’s obligations? fid en During the applicable warranty period, provided the Product is returned in accordance with the terms of this Limited Warranty, SAMSUNG will repair or replace the Product, at SAMSUNG’s sole option, without charge. SAMSUNG may, at SAMSUNG’s sole option, use rebuilt, reconditioned, or new parts or components when repairing any Product, or may replace the Product with a rebuilt, reconditioned or new Product. on Repaired/replaced cases, pouches and holsters will be warranted for a period of ninety (90) days. All other repaired/ replaced Products will be warranted for a period equal to the 224 ta ry remainder of the original Limited Warranty on the original Product or for ninety (90) days, whichever is longer. All replaced Products, parts, components, boards and equipment shall become the property of SAMSUNG. Except to any extent expressly allowed by applicable law, transfer or assignment of this Limited Warranty is prohibited. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie or transmission, or viruses or other software problems introduced into the Product; or (j) Product used or purchased outside the United States. This Limited Warranty covers batteries only if battery capacity falls below 80% of rated capacity or the battery leaks, and this Limited Warranty does not cover any battery if (i) the battery has been charged by a battery charger not specified or approved by SAMSUNG for charging the battery; (ii) any of the seals on the battery are broken or show evidence of tampering; or (iii) the battery has been used in equipment other than the SAMSUNG phone for which it is specified. What must you do to obtain warranty service? To obtain service under this Limited Warranty, you must return the Product to an authorized phone service facility in an adequate container for shipping, accompanied by the sales receipt or comparable proof of sale showing the original date of purchase, the serial number of the Product and the seller’s name and address. To obtain assistance on where to deliver the Product, please call SAMSUNG Customer Care at 1-888-987-4357. If SAMSUNG determines that any Product is not covered by this Limited Warranty, you must pay all parts, shipping, and labor charges for the repair or return of such Product. You should keep a separate backup copy of any contents of the Product before delivering the Product to SAMSUNG for warranty service, as some or all of the contents may be deleted or reformatted during the course of warranty service. fid en tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL SAMSUNG BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT OR FOR, WITHOUT LIMITATION, COMMERCIAL LOSS OF ANY SORT; LOSS OF USE, TIME, DATA, REPUTATION, OPPORTUNITY, GOODWILL, PROFITS OR SAVINGS; INCONVENIENCE; INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES; OR DAMAGES ARISING FROM THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT. SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, OR THE DISCLAIMER OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS AND DISCLAIMERS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. OR SUITABILITY OF ANY THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE PRODUCT, OR THE ABILITY TO INTEGRATE ANY SUCH SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT WITH THE PRODUCT, WHETHER SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT IS INCLUDED WITH THE PRODUCT DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG OR OTHERWISE. RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE QUALITY, CAPABILITIES, OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE AND SUITABILITY OF ANY SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT RESTS SOLELY WITH THE USER AND THE DIRECT VENDOR, OWNER OR SUPPLIER OF SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT. ry THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SETS OUT THE FULL EXTENT OF SAMSUNG’S RESPONSIBILITIES, AND THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING THE PRODUCTS. ta What are the limits on SAMSUNG’s liability? on SAMSUNG MAKES NO WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, AS TO THE QUALITY, CAPABILITIES, OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE Nothing in the Product instructions or information shall be construed to create an express warranty of any kind with respect to the Products. No agent, employee, dealer, representative or reseller is authorized to modify or extend this Limited Warranty or to make binding representations or claims, whether in advertising, presentations or otherwise, on behalf of SAMSUNG regarding the Products or this Limited Warranty. This Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights that vary from state to state. Warranty Information 225 ry For any arbitration in which your total damage claims, exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees, are $5,000.00 or less (“Small Claim”), the arbitrator may, if you prevail, award your reasonable attorney fees, expert witness fees and costs as part of any award, but may not grant SAMSUNG its attorney fees, expert witness fees or costs unless it is determined that the claim was brought in bad faith. In a Small Claim case, you shall be required to pay no more than half of the total administrative, facility and arbitrator fees, or $50.00 of such fees, whichever is less, and SAMSUNG shall pay the remainder of such fees. Administrative, facility and arbitrator fees for arbitrations in which your total damage claims, exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees, exceed $5,000.00 (“Large Claim”) shall be determined according to AAA rules. In a Large Claim case, the arbitrator may grant to the prevailing party, or apportion among the parties, reasonable attorney fees, expert witness fees and costs. Judgment may be entered on the arbitrator’s award in any court of competent jurisdiction. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie ALL DISPUTES WITH SAMSUNG ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM THIS LIMITED WARRANTY OR THE SALE, CONDITION OR PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCTS SHALL BE RESOLVED EXCLUSIVELY THROUGH FINAL AND BINDING ARBITRATION, AND NOT BY A COURT OR JURY. ta What is the procedure for resolving disputes? 226 on fid en Any such dispute shall not be combined or consolidated with a dispute involving any other person’s or entity’s Product or claim, and specifically, without limitation of the foregoing, shall not under any circumstances proceed as part of a class action. The arbitration shall be conducted before a single arbitrator, whose award may not exceed, in form or amount, the relief allowed by the applicable law. The arbitration shall be conducted according to the American Arbitration Association (AAA) Commercial Arbitration Rules applicable to consumer disputes. This arbitration provision is entered pursuant to the Federal Arbitration Act. The laws of the State of Texas, without reference to its choice of laws principles, shall govern the interpretation of the Limited Warranty and all disputes that are subject to this arbitration provision. The arbitrator shall decide all issues of interpretation and application of this arbitration provision and the Limited Warranty. This arbitration provision also applies to claims against SAMSUNG’s employees, representatives and affiliates if any such claim arises from the Product’s sale, condition or performance. ta ry Severability If any portion of this Limited Warranty is held to be illegal or unenforceable, such partial illegality or unenforceability shall not affect the enforceability of the remainder of the Limited Warranty. Precautions for Transfer and Disposal on fid en tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie You may opt out of this dispute resolution procedure by providing notice to SAMSUNG no later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer purchaser’s purchase of the Product. To opt out, you must send notice by e-mail to optout@sta.samsung.com, with the subject line: “Arbitration Opt Out.” You must include in the opt out e-mail (a) your name and address; (b) the date on which the Product was purchased; (c) the Product model name or model number; and (d) the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number, as applicable, if you have it (the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number can be found (i) on the Product box; (ii) on the Product information screen, which can be found under “Settings;” (iii) on a label on the back of the Product beneath the battery, if the battery is removable; and (iv) on the outside of the Product if the battery is not removable). Alternatively, you may opt out by calling 1-888-987-4357 no later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer purchaser’s purchase of the Product and providing the same information. These are the only two forms of notice that will be effective to opt out of this dispute resolution procedure. Opting out of this dispute resolution procedure will not affect the coverage of the Limited Warranty in any way, and you will continue to enjoy the benefits of the Limited Warranty. If data stored on this device is deleted or reformatted using the standard methods, the data only appears to be removed on a superficial level, and it may be possible for someone to retrieve and reuse the data by means of special software. To avoid unintended information leaks and other problems of this sort, it is recommended that the device be returned to Samsung’s Customer Care Center for an Extended File System (EFS) Clear which will eliminate all user memory and return all settings to default settings. Please contact the Samsung Customer Care Center for details. Important! Please provide warranty information (proof of purchase) to Samsung’s Customer Care Center in order to provide this service at no charge. If the warranty has expired on the device, charges may apply. Warranty Information 227 BY CLICKING THE “I ACCEPT” BUTTON (OR IF YOU BYPASS OR OTHERWISE DISABLE THE “I ACCEPT”, AND STILL INSTALL, COPY, DOWNLOAD, ACCESS OR OTHERWISE USE THE SOFTWARE), YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS EULA. IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THE TERMS IN THIS EULA, YOU MUST CLICK THE “DECLINE” BUTTON, AND DISCONTINUE USE OF THE SOFTWARE. Phone: 1-800-SAMSUNG Phone: 1-888-987-HELP (4357) © tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie 2012 Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC. All rights reserved. ta ry Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC 1301 E. Lookout Drive Richardson, Texas 75082 No reproduction in whole or in part allowed without prior written approval. Specifications and availability subject to change without notice. [111611] End User License Agreement for Software 228 on fid en IMPORTANT. READ CAREFULLY: This End User License Agreement (“EULA”) is a legal agreement between you (either an individual or a single entity) and Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. for software owned by Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. and its affiliated companies and its third party suppliers and licensors that accompanies this EULA, which includes computer software and may include associated media, printed materials, “online” or electronic documentation (“Software”). 1. GRANT OF LICENSE. Samsung grants you the following rights provided that you comply with all terms and conditions of this EULA: You may install, use, access, display and run one copy of the Software on the local hard disk(s) or other permanent storage media of one computer and use the Software on a single computer or a mobile device at a time, and you may not make the Software available over a network where it could be used by multiple computers at the same time. You may make one copy of the Software in machine-readable form for backup purposes only; provided that the backup copy must include all copyright or other proprietary notices contained on the original. 2. RESERVATION OF RIGHTS AND OWNERSHIP. Samsung reserves all rights not expressly granted to you in this EULA. The Software is protected by copyright and other intellectual ry tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie 3. LIMITATIONS ON END USER RIGHTS. You may not reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to discover the source code or algorithms of, the Software (except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law not withstanding this limitation), or modify, or disable any features of, the Software, or create derivative works based on the Software. You may not rent, lease, lend, sublicense or provide commercial hosting services with the Software. the date you obtain your initial copy of the Software, unless we provide other terms along with such upgrade. To use Software identified as an upgrade, you must first be licensed for the Software identified by Samsung as eligible for the upgrade. After upgrading, you may no longer use the Software that formed the basis for your upgrade eligibility. ta property laws and treaties. Samsung or its suppliers own the title, copyright and other intellectual property rights in the Software. The Software is licensed, not sold. fid en 4. CONSENT TO USE OF DATA. You agree that Samsung and its affiliates may collect and use technical information gathered as part of the product support services related to the Software provided to you, if any, related to the Software. Samsung may use this information solely to improve its products or to provide customized services or technologies to you and will not disclose this information in a form that personally identifies you. on 5. UPGRADES. This EULA applies to updates, supplements and add-on components (if any) of the Software that Samsung may provide to you or make available to you after 6. SOFTWARE TRANSFER. You may not transfer this EULA or the rights to the Software granted herein to any third party unless it is in connection with the sale of the mobile device which the Software accompanied. In such event, the transfer must include all of the Software (including all component parts, the media and printed materials, any upgrades, this EULA) and you may not retain any copies of the Software. The transfer may not be an indirect transfer, such as a consignment. Prior to the transfer, the end user receiving the Software must agree to all the EULA terms. 7. EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. You acknowledge that the Software is subject to export restrictions of various countries. You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the Software, including the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as end user, end use, and destination restrictions issued by U.S. and other governments. Warranty Information 229 ta ry Purchaser, and do not constitute or imply an endorsement, sponsorship, or recommendation of, or affiliation with the third-party or its products and services. Purchaser agrees that SAMSUNG shall not be responsible or liable, directly or indirectly, for any damage or loss caused or alleged to caused by, or in connection with, use of or reliance on any such third-party content, products, or services available on or through any such application. Purchaser acknowledges and agrees that your use of any third-party application is governed by such third-party application provider’s Terms of Use, License Agreement, Privacy Policy, or other such agreement and that any information or personal data you provide, whether knowingly or unknowingly, to such thirdparty application provider, will be subject to such third-party application provider’s privacy policy, if such a policy exists. SAMSUNG DISCLAIMS ANY RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY DISCLOSURE OF INFORMATION OR ANY OTHER PRACTICES OF ANY THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER. tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie 8. TERMINATION. This EULA is effective until terminated. Your rights under this License will terminate automatically without notice from Samsung if you fail to comply with any of the terms and conditions of this EULA. Upon termination of this EULA, you must cease all use of the Software and destroy all copies, full or partial, of the Software. 230 on fid en 9. THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS. Certain third-party applications may be included with, or downloaded to this mobile device. SAMSUNG makes no representations whatsoever about any of these applications. Since SAMSUNG has no control over such applications, Purchaser acknowledges and agrees that SAMSUNG is not responsible for the availability of such applications and is not responsible or liable for any content, advertising, products, services, or other materials on or available from such applications. Purchaser expressly acknowledges and agrees that use of third-party applications is at Purchaser’s sole risk and that the entire risk of unsatisfactory quality, performance, accuracy and effort is with Purchaser. It is up to Purchaser to take precautions to ensure that whatever Purchaser selects to use is free of such items as viruses, worms, Trojan horses, and other items of a destructive nature. References on this mobile device to any names, marks, products, or services of any third-parties are provided solely as a convenience to 10. Disclaimer of Warranty Regarding Third-Party Applications. SAMSUNG DOES NOT WARRANT OR MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING THE AVAILABILITY, USE, TIMELINESS, SECURITY, VALIDITY, ACCURACY, OR RELIABILITY OF, OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF, OR OTHERWISE RESPECTING, THE CONTENT OF ANY ta ry ACCURACY, LACK OF VIRUSES, QUIET ENJOYMENT, NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS OR OTHER VIOLATION OF RIGHTS. SAMSUNG DOES NOT WARRANT AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION, THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION WILL MEET PURCHASER’S REQUIREMENTS, THAT THE OPERATION OF THE THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION WILL BE CORRECTED. PURCHASER ASSUMES THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR, OR CORRECTION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. NO ADVICE OR INFORMATION, WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN, OBTAINED BY PURCHASER FROM SAMSUNG SHALL BE DEEMED TO ALTER THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY REGARDING THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS, OR TO CREATE ANY WARRANTY. on fid en tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION WHETHER SUCH THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION IS INCLUDED WITH THE PRODUCT DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG, IS DOWNLOADED, OR OTHERWISE OBTAINED. USE OF ANY THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION IS DONE AT PURCHASER’S OWN DISCRETION AND RISK AND PURCHASER IS SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY DAMAGE TO YOUR MOBILE DEVICE OR LOSS OF DATA THAT RESULTS FROM THE DOWNLOADING OR USE OF SUCH THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS. SAMSUNG EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY REGARDING WHETHER PURCHASER’S PERSONAL INFORMATION IS CAPTURED BY ANY THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER OR THE USE TO WHICH SUCH PERSONAL INFORMATION MAY BE PUT BY SUCH THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER. ANY THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS PROVIDED WITH THIS MOBILE DEVICE ARE PROVIDED “AS IS” AND ON AN “AS AVAILABLE” BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND FROM SAMSUNG, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT POSSIBLE PURSUANT TO APPLICABLE LAW, SAMSUNG DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS, IMPLIED, OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY OR WORKMANLIKE EFFORT, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, RELIABILITY OR AVAILABILITY, 11. Limitation of Liability. SAMSUNG WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE ANY THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION, ITS CONTENT OR FUNCTIONALITY, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO DAMAGES Warranty Information 231 ta ry 12. U.S. Government End Users Restricted Rights. The Software is licensed only with "restricted rights" and as "commercial items" consisting of "commercial software" and "commercial software documentation" with only those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein. All Software and Products provided to the United States Government pursuant to solicitations issued on or after December 1, 1995 is provided with the commercial rights and restrictions described elsewhere herein. All Software and Products provided to the United States Government pursuant to solicitations issued prior to December 1, 1995 are provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS as provided for in FAR, 48 CFR 52.227-14 (JUNE 1987) or DFAR, 48 CFR 252.227-7013 (OCT 1988), as applicable. 232 on fid en tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie CAUSED BY OR RELATED TO ERRORS, OMISSIONS, INTERRUPTIONS, DEFECTS, DELAY IN OPERATION OR TRANSMISSION, COMPUTER VIRUS, FAILURE TO CONNECT, NETWORK CHARGES, AND ALL OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES EVEN IF SAMSUNG HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. NOT WITHSTANDING THE FOREGOING, SAMSUNG’S TOTAL LIABILITY TO PURCHASER FOR ALL LOSSES, DAMAGES, CAUSES OF ACTION, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THOSE BASED ON CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE, ARISING OUT OF PURCHASER’S USE OF THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS ON THIS MOBILE DEVICE, OR ANY OTHER PROVISION OF THIS EULA, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE AMOUNT PURCHASER PAID SPECIFICALLY FOR ANY SUCH THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION THAT WAS INCLUDED WITH THIS MOBILE DEVICE. THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS, EXCLUSIONS, AND DISCLAIMERS (INCLUDING SECTIONS 9, 10, AND 11) SHALL APPLY TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. 13. APPLICABLE LAW. This EULA is governed by the laws of TEXAS, without regard to conflicts of laws principles. This EULA shall not be governed by the UN Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods, the application of which is expressly excluded. If a dispute, controversy or difference is not amicably settled, it shall be finally resolved by arbitration in Seoul, Korea in accordance with the C on ta fid en tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie 14. ENTIRE AGREEMENT; SEVERABILITY. This EULA is the entire agreement between you and Samsung relating to the Software and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous oral or written communications, proposals and representations with respect to the Software or any other subject matter covered by this EULA. If any provision of this EULA is held to be void, invalid, unenforceable or illegal, the other provisions shall continue in full force and effect. ry Arbitration Rules of the Korean Commercial Arbitration Board. The award of arbitration shall be final and binding upon the parties. Warranty Information 233 ta Sign Up Now ry Section 13: Samsung Product Registration tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Customize your Samsung device experience • Activate product warranty • Access to a personalized My Samsung Mobile account • No monthly fees Get More • Latest info on promotions, events and special ofers on related products • Review Samsung products and share your opinion • Great deals on downloads fid en Register now at www.samsung.com/register 234 on Scan this code to go directly to the registration page. Index ry allow mock locations 151 managing 133 running services 133 AT&T Code Scanner 175 AT&T FamilyMap 176 AT&T Locker 177 AT&T Music Playlists 90 AT&T Navigator 177 AT&T Smart Wi-Fi 164 ta Managing Address Book Contacts 82 Service Dialing Numbers 84 Using Contacts List 75 Address Book Options 79 Adobe PDF 195 Airplane mode 121, 129 Alarm 180 AllShare Definitions 171 AllShare Cast 127 AllShare Play 171 Configuring Settings 173 Group Cast 175 Sharing Media 174 Web Storage Setup 173 AllShareCast Hub 172 Applications Using the Camcorder 100 Using the Camera 95 World Clock 181 Applications settings on fid en tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Abc mode 67 About Device 152 Accounts 146 Add accounts 146 Adding a New Contact Idle Screen 73 Address Book 72 Adding a New Contact 73 Adding Pauses to Contact Numbers 74 Copying a contact to the Phone 83 Copying Contacts to Phone 83 Copying Contacts to SIM Card 82 Deleting Address Book Entries 84 Deleting Contacts from SIM card 83 Dialing a Number 75 Favorites 82 Finding an Address Book Entry 76 Group Settings 81 Back key 34 Battery charging 9 Installing 7 Low Battery Indicator 11 Battery Use & Safety 208 Bigger Font Setting 150 Blocking Mode 128 On 128 Bluetooth 235 fid en on 236 ry Adding a Buddy 117 Register 116 Using 117 Children and Cell Phones 204 Clock 135, 180 Cloud 144 Code Scanner 175 Contacts 72 Cookies Emptying 157 Creating a Playlist 90 tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Calculator 178 Calendar 178 Call Functions 48 3-Way Calling (Multi-Party Calling) 57 Address Book 51 Adjusting the Call Volume 55 Answering a Call 51 Call Back Missed Call 53 Call Duration 55 Call Log 52 Call Waiting 59 Correcting the Number 49 Dialing a Recent Number 49 Ending a Call 49 International Call 48 Making a Call 48 Manual Pause Dialing 48 Options During a Call 55 Putting a Call on Hold 56 Saving a recent call number to Address Book 53 Searching for a Number in Address Book 59 Using the Speakerphone 58 Viewing All Calls 53 Viewing Missed Calls 53 Camcorder 100 Camcorder Options 101 Shooting Video 100 Camcorder Options Camcorder Options after a Video is Taken 103 Camera 95 Camera Options 96 Lock Screen Shortcut 135 Taking Pictures 95 Camercorder Taking Pictures During Video 101 Care and Maintenance 213 Changing Your Settings 119 Charging battery 9 ChatON 116 ta Outgoing Headset Condition 61 Sending contacts 167 Books Play Books 193 Developer Options 152 Dialing Options 52 Display icons 23 Using Negative Colors 150 Display / Touch-Screen 211 Do cell phones pose a health hazard? 200 Downloads 183 Draft Messages 105 Email 111 Adding a contact 81 Editing 81 Removing a contact 81 Group Cast 175 Group Settings Editing a Caller Group 81 ry tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Gallery 93 viewing pictures 94 viewing videos 94 Gestures Browse Image 36, 147 Overview 35 Screen Capture 36, 148 Shake to Update 36, 147 Tilt to Zoom 36, 147 Getting Started 6 Setting Up Your Phone 6 Voice mail 13 Gmail 113 Google Chrome 180 Google Maps 187 Google Play Music 91 Google Voice Typing 69 Google voice typing settings 140 GPS 212 Group fid en Flipboard 184 Font Size Changing 150 ta Creating a Corporate Email Account 111 Creating Additional Email Accounts 112 Switching Between Email Accounts 112 Emergency Calls 212 Making 49 With SIM 49 Without SIM 49 Entering Text 66 Changing the Text Entry Mode 67 Using 123Sym Mode 68 Using Abc Mode 67 Using Swype 69, 70 Using Symbol/Numeric Mode 68 Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) Signals 200 on Family Map 176 FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC) Regulations for Wireless Devices 218 FCC Notice and Cautions 220 Featured Apps 184 Handwriting feature 69 Health and Safety Information 200 Home City Setting 135 Home key 34 Hotspot Guru 164 Hotspots 164 Icons Application 26 Indicator 23 Icons, description 23 In-Call Options 55 Incognito 156 Create Window 156 Exit Window 156 Information Ticker 135 237 J Joining Contacts 77 on 238 fid en Landscape 66 Language and input 139 Language and keyboard settings select locale 139 Latitude 185 Local 187 Location services settings 134 Lock Screen Camera Quick Access 135 Clock 135 Dual Clock 135 Ripple Effect 135 Maps 187 Media Hub 30, 85 Memory Card 46 Memory Card Installation 8 Menu key 34 Menu Navigation 34 Message Reply 118 Message Options 105 Message Search 109 Messaging Adding a Signature 111 Block Unknown Senders 111 Cloud Backup 144 Creating and Sending Text Messages 104 Deleting a message 108 Draft 105 tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Keyboard Input Methods 140 Keyboard settings 140 Keypad Changing Text Input 67 Kies via Wi-Fi 123 Gmail 113 Handwriting 69 Locked 106 Options 105 Scheduled Messages 106 Settings 109 Signing into Email 111 Signing into Gmail 113 Spam 106 Split View 109 Types of Messages 104 Messenger 115, 189 microSD card 8, 46 Installing 8 Removing 8 microSDHC card 8, 46 Mobile Web 154 Entering Text in the Mobile Web Browser 155 Navigating with the Mobile Web 154 Using Bookmarks 156 Mono Audio Setup 150 ry Say Wake-Up Command 135 Shortcuts 135 Ticker 135 Weather 135 ta International Call 48 Internet 154 tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Places 193 Play Books 193 Play Movies & TV 93 Play Music 91 Play Store 194 Pointer speed 143 Polaris Office 4.0 195 Polaris® Office 32, 195 Portable Wi-Fi hotspot 123 Powering Off 11 On 11 Privacy settings factory data reset 145 ry terms used 34 touch gestures 34 Navigation Options 191 Navigator 177 Negative Colors 150 NFC 170 ta Movies 93 Multimedia 85 Music File Extensions 3GP 88 AAC 88 AAC+ 88 eAAC+ 88 M4A 88 MP3 88 MP4 88 WMA 88 Music Hub 87 Making a Purchase 88 Music Player 88 adding music 91 creating a playlist 90 removing music 91 Mute 56, 59 My Files 189 myAT&T 190 One-handed operation 139 Operating Environment 216 Other Important Safety Information 221 Owner information 135 on fid en Navigation 191 command keys 34 context-sensitive menus 34 PC Connections 168 Pen Settings 148 Phone Front View 16 icons 23 Rear View 18 Side View 17 Switching On/Off 11 Phone information 152 Pictures 93 Gallery 93 QWERTY keypad 66 Ready2Go 12 Reducing Exposure Hands-Free Kits and Other Accessories 203 Reject list 54 Reset factory data 145 239 240 on fid en S Note 195 S Pen Settings 148 S Suggest 195 S Voice 196 Set Wake-Up Command 135 Samsung Mobile Products and Recycling 210 Screen Capture 36, 148, 175 SD Card 46 Security 145 Security settings device administration 137 trusted credentials 138 Service Dialing Numbers 84 Settings 119 Shortcuts 22 ry Swype Keypad Settings 142 Swype Settings 71 Symbol/Numeric mode 68 Synchronization settings auto-sync 134 ta SIM card installation 7 Installing 6 Smart Practices While Driving 207 Smart Wi-Fi 164 Snooze 181 Software Update 153 Spam Block Unknown Senders 111 Manually Register a Number 111 Register a Phrase 111 Settings 111 Spam Messages 106 Assigning 106 Speakerphone Key 58 Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Certification Information 205 Standard Limited Warranty 223 Stopwatch 182 SugarSync Setup 173 Swap 57 SWYPE entering text using 69, 70 tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Responsible Listening 214 Restricting Children's Access to Your Mobile device 220 Ripple 135 Ripple Effect Lock Screen 135 T9 Trace 141 see Swype 141 Tethering 123 Text Input Abc mode 67 Methods 66 numeric mode 68 symbol mode 68 Timer 182 Automatic Answering 61 Touch Screen 12 Lock/Unlock 12 Travel Charger 9 Using 10 TTY Mode 64 UL Certified Travel Charger 211 Understanding Your Phone 15 V Video Player 92 Voice Mail Accessing 14 From Another Phone 14 Setup 13 Voice Recorder 197 Volume 129 ry tia DR l a AF nd T Pr op rie Web 154 Widgets Calculator 28 Camera 28 Email 29 Gmail 29, 184 Settings 33, 196 Video Player 33 Voice Recorder 33, 197 YouTube 33 Wi-Fi 160 using Kies via Wi-Fi 127 Wi-Fi Direct 162 World Clock Deleting an Entry 181 World clock 181 ta Features of Your Phone 15 Front View 16 Rear View 18 Side Views 17 Unmute 56 USB settings mass storage device 169 USB Tethering 123 Using Favorites Adding Favorites 157 Deleting a Favorite 157 Editing Favorites 157 on Warranty Information 223 Weather Setting 135 fid en YouTube 198 YPmobile (Yellowpages mobile) 199 241
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.7 Linearized : Yes Encryption : Standard V4.4 (128-bit) User Access : Print, Print high-res Author : wcarlisl Create Date : 2012:09:12 07:52:33Z Modify Date : 2012:09:18 13:28:44-04:00 SPDF : 1112 Subject : i317 Galaxy Note II User Manual Has XFA : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c041 52.342996, 2008/05/07-20:48:00 Format : application/pdf Creator : wcarlisl Description : i317 Galaxy Note II User Manual Title : i317 Galaxy Note II User Manual Creator Tool : FrameMaker 9.0 Metadata Date : 2012:09:18 13:28:44-04:00 Enhanced : By PDF Enhancer 3.1/Win Spdf : 1112 Producer : Acrobat Distiller 9.4.5 (Windows) Document ID : uuid:a04753de-424a-4120-9941-b5c67af12cf3 Instance ID : uuid:5ce34c78-4209-44e3-862b-96613c129df0 Page Layout : SinglePage Page Mode : UseOutlines Page Count : 247EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools